FUNAI FDRV90E User Manual

Owner’s Manual  
DVD Recorder with Video Cassette Recorder  
FDRV-90E  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
DUBBING  
REW  
F.FWD STOP/EJECT PLAY  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
RECORD  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
DVD  
DVD  
VCR  
VCR  
VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of  
Gemstar Development Corporation.TheVCR Plus+  
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
INSTRUCCIONES EN ESPAÑOL INCLUIDAS  
INSTRUCTIONS EN FRANÇAIS INCLUSES  
Supplied Accessory  
• Remote control  
(NA817UD)  
with two AA batteries  
• RF cable  
WPZ0901TM002)  
• Audio/Video cables  
(WPZ0102TM015 or  
WPZ0102LTE01)  
• Owner’s Manual  
(1VMN20226)  
• Quick Use Guide  
(1VMN20295)  
(
Owner's Manual  
If you need additional operating assistance after reading this owner’s manual or to  
order replacement accessories, please call  
TOLL FREE : 1-800-605-8453  
or visit our web site at http://www.funai.us  
Before you use this unit , you need to complete connections. Refer to  
“Connections” on pages 13-15.  
To record a program easily, refer to “Easy DVD recording” on pages 16-17  
after connections are completed.  
(You CANNOT record on any copyright protected DVD disc with this unit.)  
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Important Safeguards  
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions  
should be read before the appliance is operated.  
porting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna  
discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of anten-  
na-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and  
requirements for the grounding electrode. (Fig.A)  
2. Retain Instructions-The safety and operating instructions should  
be retained for future reference.  
3. HeedWarnings -All warnings on the appliance and in the oper-  
ating instructions should be adhered to.  
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should  
be followed.  
FIGURE A  
ANTENNA  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
LEAD  
WIRE  
5. Cleaning - Unplug this product from the wall outlet before  
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810-20)  
EXCEPTION:A product that is meant for uninterrupted ser-  
vice and, that for some specific reason, such as the possibility  
of the loss of an authorization code for a CATV converter, is  
not intended to be unplugged by the user for cleaning or any  
other purpose, may exclude the reference to unplugging the  
appliance in the cleaning description otherwise required in  
item 5.  
6.Attachments - Do not use attachments not recommended by  
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.  
7.Water and Moisture- Do not use this product near water, for  
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry  
tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and the like.  
8.Accessories - Do not place this product on an unstable cart,  
stand,tripod,bracket,or table.The product may fall,causing seri-  
ous injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appli-  
ance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table rec-  
ommended by the manufacturer, or sold  
with the product. Any mounting of the  
appliance should follow the manufacturer's  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810-21)  
GROUND CLAMP  
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
S2898A  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250, PART H)  
14. Lightning - For added protection for this product during a light-  
ning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long  
periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect  
the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the  
product due to lightning and power-line surges.  
15. Power Lines -An outside antenna system should not be located  
in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or  
power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or cir-  
cuits.When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care  
should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or cir-  
cuits as contact with them might be fatal.  
16. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords  
as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
17. Object and Liquid Entry - Never push objects of any kind into  
this product through any openings as they may touch dangerous  
voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or  
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
18. Servicing - Do not attempt to service this product yourself as  
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous volt-  
age or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service per-  
sonnel.  
19. Damage Requiring Service - Unplug this product from the wall  
outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under  
the following conditions:  
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.  
b.If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.  
c.If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d.If the product does not operate normally by following the oper-  
ating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered  
by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of  
other controls may result in damage and will often require  
extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product  
to its normal operation.  
instructions and should use a mounting  
accessory recommended by the manufac-  
turer. An appliance and cart combination  
should be moved with care. Quick stops,  
excessive force, and uneven surfaces may  
cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.  
9.Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and  
to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be  
blocked or covered.The openings should never be blocked by  
placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.  
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such  
as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or  
the manufacturer's instructions have been adhered to.  
10. Power Sources -This product should be operated only from the  
type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are  
not sure of the type of power supply to your home,consult your  
appliance dealer or local power company. For products intend-  
ed to operate from battery power,or other sources,refer to the  
operating instructions.  
11. Grounding or Polarization - This product is equipped with a  
polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade  
wider than the other).This plug will fit into the power outlet  
only one way.This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert  
the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug  
should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your  
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar-  
ized plug.  
12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed  
so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items  
placed upon or against them,paying particular attention to cords  
at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit  
from the appliance.  
e.If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.  
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance this  
indicates a need for service.  
20. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are required, be  
sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified  
by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the  
original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, elec-  
tric shock or other hazards.  
21. Safety Check - Upon completion of any service or repairs to this  
product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating condition.  
22. Heat -This product should be situated away from heat sources  
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products  
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
13. Outdoor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or cable  
system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or  
cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection  
against voltage surges and built-up static charges.Article 810 of  
the National Electrical Code,ANSI/NFPA No.70,provides infor-  
mation with regard to proper grounding of the mast and sup-  
3
Before you start  
Precautions (cont’d)  
Symbol  
Description  
Installation Location  
Available to DVDVideo discs  
DVD-V  
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:  
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not  
place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not place  
the unit directly on top of the TV.  
• Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from  
sources of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places.  
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat  
dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on the  
sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong vibra-  
tion or strong magnetic fields.  
Available to DVD-RW inVideo mode  
Available to DVD-RW inVR mode  
Available to DVD-R discs  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
CCDD  
Available to Audio CDs  
Available to CD-R/RW discs with  
MP3 files  
Available toVHS tapes  
MP3  
VCR  
Use only cassettes marked  
.
Indicates that you need to select the DVD  
mode by pressing DVD button on the  
remote control before proceeding next step.  
DVD  
VCR  
First:  
(Press:)  
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire  
Indicates that you need to select theVCR  
mode by pressingVCR button on the  
remote control before proceeding next step.  
First:  
(Press:)  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it  
from AC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug.  
• If by accident water is spilled on this unit, unplug the  
power cord immediately and take the unit to our  
Authorized Service Center for servicing.  
• Do not put your fingers or objects into the unit cassette  
holder.  
Maintenance  
SERVICING  
• Please refer to relevant topics on the Troubleshooting  
Guide on pages 101-104 before returning the product.  
• If this unit becomes inoperative, do not try to correct the  
problem by yourself.There are no user-serviceable parts  
inside.Turn off, unplug the power plug, and please call our  
help line mentioned on the front page to locate an  
Authorized Service Center.  
Moisture Condensation Warning  
Moisture condensation may occur inside the unit when it is  
moved from a cold place to a warm place, or after heating  
a cold room or under conditions of high humidity. Do not  
use this unit at least for 2 hours until its inside gets dry.  
CLEANINGTHE CABINET  
Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do  
not use a solution containing alcohol, spirits, ammonia or abrasive.  
About Copyright  
CLEANING DISCS  
Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance  
and lending of discs are prohibited.  
• When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning  
cloth.Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in  
a circular motion.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technolo-  
gy that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.  
patents and other intellectual property rights owned by  
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise autho-  
rized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commer-  
cially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive cleaning  
agents or antistatic spray intended for analogue records.  
CLEANINGTHE DISC LENS  
If this unit still does not perform properly although you refer to  
the relevant sections and to “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE”  
in this Owner’s Manual, the laser optical pickup unit may be  
dirty. Consult your dealer or an Authorized Service Center for  
inspection and cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.  
Notice for progressive scan outputs  
DISC HANDLING  
Consumers should note that not all high definition televi-  
sion sets are fully compatible with this product and may  
cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of  
525 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended  
that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard defin-  
ition’ output. If there are questions regarding our TV set  
compatibility with this model 525p DVD recorder, please  
contact our customer service center.  
• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not  
adhere to the surfaces of the discs.  
Always store the disc in its protective case when it is not used.  
AUTO HEAD CLEANING  
• Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or  
remove a cassette, so you can see a clear picture.  
• Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted  
while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulat-  
ed on the video heads after a long period of use, or the  
usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If  
a streaky or snowy picture appears during playback, the  
video heads in the unit may need to be cleaned.  
Symbol in this owner's manual  
Many functions of this unit are depending on the disc type  
or the recording mode.  
To specify for what disc type or recording mode each  
function is, we put the following symbols at the beginning  
of each item to operate.  
1. Please visit your local Audio/Video store and purchase a  
good qualityVHSVideo Head Cleaner.  
2. If aVideo Head Cleaner does not solve the problem,  
please call our help line mentioned on the front page to  
locate an Authorized Service Center.  
NOTES:  
• Remember to read the instructions along with the video  
head cleaner before use.  
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.  
4
Before you start  
Table of contents  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Before you start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Installing batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . .9  
Using a remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
VCR/DVD recorder Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
SETUP/DISC/CD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
DISPLAY menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Title/Chapter search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Track search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Time search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Repeat/Random/Program play . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Program play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Selecting the format of audio and video . . . . . .60  
Switching audio soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Reducing block noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Connection to aTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Connection to a cable box or satellite box . . . .14  
Connection to an Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Information on disc editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Guide to a title list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Editing discs inVideo mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Editing discs inVR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode . . . . . . . .65  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) . .69  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Deleting parts of titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Setting pictures for thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Setting titles to protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Releasing titles from protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) . . .78  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Deleting parts of titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Setting or clearing chapter markers . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Setting pictures for thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Adding titles to a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Deleting a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Editing DVD-R discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Putting names on titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Easy DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Channel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Getting channels automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Adding/deleting channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Guide channel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Selecting theTV stereo or SAP . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Clock setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Manual Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Setting the daylight saving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Selecting theTV aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Information on DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Recording speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Restrictions on recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Information on copy control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Making discs playable in other DVD player (Finalize) 29  
Formatting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Settings for the recording format to a blank disc . . .30  
Reformatting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Basic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Checking the recording picture quality . . . . . . . . . .34  
One-touch timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Hints for timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Changing the SETUP menu . . . . . . . . .89  
Tour of the SETUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Settings for Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Settings for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Settings for Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Settings for Parental lock level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
®
Timer recording usingVCR Plus+ system . . . . .39  
Settings for an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Connection to an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Recording from an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Dubbing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Finalizing the discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Setting a disc to protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
VCR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Recording and One-touch timer recording . . . .98  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
One-touch timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Index search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Time search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Other operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Information on DVD play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Guide to displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Playing discs using the disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Playing discs using the title menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Special playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Resume play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Fast forward / Fast reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Skipping TV commercials during play . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Step by step playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Slow forward / Slow reverse play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Spatializer setting (Virtual surround) . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Marker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
RF converter output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Español . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Français . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
5
Before you start  
Features  
This unit not only plays DVDs, CDs andVHS tapes but also offers features for you to record to DVD discs  
and edit them after that.The following features are offered with this unit.  
VCR mode  
Recording  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the  
DVD mode VCR mode  
Index search/Time search functions. An index mark will be  
This unit is compatible with both DVD-RW, which is rewritable  
repeatedly and DVD-R, which is available for recording once.  
Also, this unit allows you to record to the video cassette tape.  
You can choose either one for your convenience.  
assigned at the beginning of each recording you make. For  
Time search function, you can go to a specific point on a tape  
by entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip.  
Up to 8 programs recording:  
Editing  
DVD mode  
You can program the unit to record up to 8 programs, up  
to a year in advance. Daily or weekly program recordings  
are also available.  
Setting/Clearing chapter markers:  
One-touch timer recording:  
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your  
recordings for easy editing. (VR mode)  
You can easily set a recording time as you prefer. Every  
time the REC/OTR button on the remote control or the  
RECORD button on the front panel pressed during  
recording, the recording time will be increased by 30 min-  
utes up to 8 hours.The recording automatically stops  
when the recording time you set is reached.  
Making your own Playlist:  
With the original remains as it is, you can edit titles on  
Various playlist as you prefer.  
Putting names on titles.  
Setting pictures for thumbnails.  
Setting/clearing chapter markers.  
Deleting parts of titles, etc.  
TheVCR Plus+ system:  
You can program the automatic timer recording using the  
PlusCode programming numbers that are printed in most  
newspaper TV listings and TV Guide magazine.  
Protecting titles:  
To avoid editing or erasing titles, the protect function is  
useful when it is ON in the original list.  
Dubbing mode:  
You can copy a DVD disc to a videotape or copy a video-  
tape to a DVD disc.This function will be possible only if  
the DVD disc and the videotape are not copy protected.  
Compatibility  
DVD mode  
DVD mode  
REC MONITOR:  
Available for playing discs recorded inVideo mode  
on a regular DVD player (Video mode):  
Discs recorded in theVideo mode can be played on regular  
DVD players, including computer DVD drives compatible with  
DVD-Video playback*.You will need to finalize the discs  
recorded inVideo mode to play in other DVD players.  
* DVD-Video Format (Video mode) is a new format for record-  
ing on DVD-R/RW discs that was approved by the DVD Forum  
in 2000. Adoption of this format is optional for manufactures  
of DVD playback devices and there are DVD-Video players,  
DVD-ROM drives or other DVD playback devices that do not  
play DVD-R/RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video Format.  
You can confirm the picture quality for recording in the  
current recording speed which you set.  
If you want to change the recording speed, press REC  
SPEED button to set the desired recording mode.  
Automatic Chapter marker setting:  
Chapter markers will be put on recordings as you set in  
SETUP menu before attempting to record.  
AutomaticTitle menu making:  
The unit makes title menus automatically when finalizing  
the disc which are recorded inVideo mode.  
Automatic PLAYLIST making (VR mode):  
A Playlist will be prepared from an Original list, so that  
you can edit titles in a Playlist as you prefer.  
An Original list is kept as it is.  
Others  
Progressive Scan system  
Play  
DVD mode  
Unlike conventional interlace scanning, the progressive scan  
system provides less flickering and images in higher resolu-  
tion than that of traditional television signals.  
Spatializer:  
You can enjoy stereophonic virtual sound of spatializer®  
N-2-2 ultra™ method provided by Desper Products, Inc.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Theater surround sound in your home:  
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder  
which is compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you are  
allowed to experience the theater surround sound from  
discs with surround sound system.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the search func-  
tion. Search for a desired point on a disc by title, chapter or time.  
Start to play from Original and Playlist (VR mode):  
Title playing is available from either an Original list or Playlist.  
Certain audio features of this product manufac-  
tured under a license from Desper Products, Inc.  
Spatializer® N-2-2 Ultra™ and the circle-in-square  
device are trademarks owned by Desper Products,  
Inc.  
6
Before you start  
Functional overview  
1
2
3 4 5  
6
Front Panel  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
DUBBING  
REW  
F.FWD STOP/EJECT PLAY  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
RECORD  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
DVD  
VCR  
22 20 18  
21 19 17  
16  
15 14 13 1211 10 9  
8
7
1. POWER button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in DVD.  
13. SELECT button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to turn the unit on and off.  
If timer programmings have been set, press to set the  
unit in timer-standby mode. Press to cancel the timer  
standby mode, then turn the unit on.  
2. Cassette compartment (VCR)  
Insert a tape here.  
Press to select the component you wish to operate.  
14. DUBBING button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to startVCR to DVD (DVD toVCR) duplication  
which you set in the SETUP menu.  
15. CHANNEL L / K button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to change the channel up and down.  
16. Display (DVD/VCR)  
3. A OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD)  
Press to open or close the disc tray.  
4. VCR SELECT indicator  
Refer to “Guide to Displays on the front panel” on page 12.  
17. Remote control sensor (DVD/VCR)  
Receive signals from your remote control so that you  
can control the unit from a distance.  
This indicator appears when theVCR output mode is selected.  
5. DVD SELECT indicator  
This indicator appears when the DVD output mode is selected.  
6. Disc tray (DVD)  
18. RECORD button (VCR)  
Place a disc when open.  
Press once to start a recording. Press repeatedly to  
start a One-Touch Recording.  
7. AUDIO (L/R) input jacks (LINE2) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with standard audio cables.  
8. VIDEO input jack (LINE2) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with a standard video cable.  
9. S-VIDEO input jack (LINE2) (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video output of external equip-  
ment with an S-Video cable.  
19. PLAY button (VCR)  
Press to start playback.  
20. STOP/EJECT button (VCR)  
EJECTbutton-Press to remove the tape from the unit.  
STOP button-Press to stop the tape motion.  
Press to stop the proceeding timer recording inVCR.  
21. F.FWD button (VCR)  
10. RECORD button (DVD)  
Press once to start a recording.  
Press to rapidly advance the tape, or view the picture  
rapidly in forward during playback. (Forward Search)  
22. REW button (VCR)  
Press repeatedly to start a One-Touch Recording.  
11. PLAY button (DVD)  
Press to start or resume play.  
Press to rewind the tape, or to view the picture rapidly  
in reverse during the playback mode. (Rewind Search)  
12. STOP button (DVD)  
Press to stop playback or recording.  
1
2 3 4 5  
6
Rear Panel  
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
DVD  
AUDIO  
Y
L
L
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
PB/  
CB  
R
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
PR/  
CR  
R
OUT  
These jacks are  
useful only in  
DVD mode.  
12 11 10  
9 8  
7
1. AC Power Cord (DVD/VCR)  
8. VIDEO OUT jack (DVD/VCR)  
Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit.  
2. S-VIDEO IN jack (LINE1) (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video output of external equip-  
ment with an S-Video cable.  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with a standard video cable.  
9. VIDEO IN jack (LINE1) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with a standard  
video cable.  
3. COMPONENTVIDEO OUT jacks (DVD only)  
Use to connect a TV monitor with component video  
inputs with component video cables.  
10. S-VIDEO OUT jack (DVD only)  
Use to connect the S-Video input of a TV monitor,AV  
receiver or other equipment with an S-Video cable.  
11. AUDIO OUT jacks (DVD only)  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with standard audio cables.  
4. AUDIO IN jacks (LINE1) (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect external equipment with standard  
audio cables.  
5. AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect a TV monitor,AV receiver or other  
equipment with standard audio cables.  
12. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL)  
jacks (DVD only)  
6. ANTENNA IN jack (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect an antenna.  
Use to connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder,  
DTS decoder or other equipment with digital input  
jacks with a digital coaxial cable or a digital optical  
cable.  
7. ANTENNA OUT jack (DVD/VCR)  
Use to connect an antenna cable to pass the signal  
from the ANTENNA IN to your TV monitor.  
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause perma-  
nent damage to the unit.  
7
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Remote Control  
7. REC MONITOR button (DVD)  
Press to check the video to be  
recorded before attempting.  
8. MENU/LIST button (DVD)  
Press to display the Disc menu.  
Press to change ORIGINAL  
and PLAYLIST on the TV  
screen.  
19. DISPLAY button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to display or change the  
on-screen display.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
17  
18  
1
20. AUDIO button (VCR)  
During playback a HiFi video  
tape, press to change the  
AUDIO OUT setting “HIFI”  
and “MONO”.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
2
3
4
5
6
8
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
(VR mode only)  
21. TOP MENU button (DVD)  
Press to display the top menu.  
22. ENTER button  
(DVD/VCR)  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
9. K / L / { / B buttons  
(DVD/VCR)  
19  
21  
7
20  
22  
MENU/LIST  
Press to select items or settings.  
10. RETURN  
button  
Press to confirm or select  
menu items.  
9
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to return to the previ-  
ously displayed menu screen.  
11. VCR button  
23. SETUP button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to display the setup menu.  
During DVD playback, press and  
hold for more than 3 seconds  
to switch to the progressive  
scanning mode or the interlace  
mode.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
23  
25  
27  
10  
11  
12  
24  
26  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Press to activate the remote  
control inVCR mode. (Refer  
to page 9.)  
STOP  
PLAY  
28  
29  
13  
14  
Press to select theVCR out-  
put mode.  
REW  
FWD  
24. VIDEO/TV button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to selectVIDEO or TV  
position.  
PAUSE  
12. SLOW button (VCR)  
During playback, press to view  
the video tape in slow motion.  
13. SKIP H button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip to  
the previous chapter or track.  
Also during pause, press to play  
reverse step by step.  
30  
15  
16  
25. DVD button  
Press to activate the remote  
control in DVD mode. (Refer  
to page 9.)  
1. POWER button (DVD/VCR)  
Press to turn the unit on and off.  
If timer programmings have  
been set, press to set the unit  
in timer-standby mode. Press  
to cancel the timer standby  
mode, then turn the unit on.  
2. VCR Plus+ button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to select the DVD out-  
put mode.  
SKIP G button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip to  
the next chapter or track.  
Also during pause, press to play  
forward step by step.  
26. REC SPEED button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to switch the recording  
speed.  
27. REC/OTR button (DVD/VCR)  
Press once to start a record-  
ing. Press repeatedly to start  
a One-Touch Recording.  
28. CH K / L buttons (DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
Press to set a timer recording  
with theVCR Plus+ program-  
ming system.  
14. REWE button (DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
During playback, press to play  
fast reverse or during pause,  
press to play slow reverse.  
VCR mode  
Press to display the timer  
program setting menu.  
3. SEARCH MODE button (VCR)  
Press to call up the index or  
time search menu.  
Press to change the channel  
up and down.  
Press to rewind the tape or  
to view the picture rapidly in  
reverse during the playback  
mode.  
VCR mode  
4. CM SKIP button (DVD)  
During playback, press to skip  
30 seconds.  
Press to change the channel  
up and down.  
15. STOP C button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to adjust the tracking  
during playback or in slow  
motion of the tape. Also  
while playback is in still mode,  
you can adjust the picture  
blurred vertically.  
5. ZOOM button (DVD)  
During playback, press to  
enlarge the picture on the  
screen.  
Press to stop playback or  
recording.  
16. PAUSE F button  
(DVD/VCR)  
6. CLEAR/C.RESET button  
(DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
Press to pause play or  
recording.  
29. FWD D button  
(DVD/VCR)  
• DVD mode  
During playback, press to play  
fast forward or during pause,  
press to play slow forward.  
VCR mode  
Press to clear the password once  
entered, to cancel the program-  
ming for CD, to clear the select-  
ing marker number in the marker  
setup mode or to clear the pro-  
gram once entered in the timer  
recording setting mode,etc.  
VCR mode  
17. OPEN/CLOSE A button (DVD)  
Press to open or close the  
disc tray.  
18. Number buttons (DVD/VCR)  
Press to select channel numbers.  
Press to select a title/chapter/track  
on display or aTV channel.  
Press to enter theVCR Plus+  
programming number.  
Also press to enter values for  
the settings in the SETUP menu.  
Press to rapidly advance the  
tape or view the picture rapidly  
in forward during playback.  
30. PLAY B button  
(DVD/VCR)  
Press to reset the tape counter.  
Press to start or resume play.  
8
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Installing batteries in the remote control Using a remote control  
Install two AA batteries (supplied) matching the  
polarity indicated inside battery compartment of the  
remote control.  
Keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
• Make sure that there is no obstacle between the  
remote control and the remote sensor on the  
unit.  
1
3
2
• Use within the operating range and angle as  
shown.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the  
remote sensor of the unit.  
• Remote control for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remote control for  
other equipment located close to the unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in  
the operating range of the remote control.  
Note:  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such  
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:  
• Do not mix new and old batteries together.  
• Do not use different kinds of batteries together,  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery com-  
partment.  
• Remove batteries from equipment that is not going  
to be used for a month or more.  
PO  
WE  
R
Within about  
23feet (7m)  
RE  
W
F
.F  
WD  
ST  
OP  
/EJ  
EC  
T
PLA  
Y
RE  
CO  
RD  
OPE  
N/CL  
OSE  
CH  
AN  
NEL  
DU  
BB  
ING  
SEL  
EC  
T
VC  
ST  
OP  
R
PL  
D
V
A
Y
D
RE  
COR  
D
S-V  
IDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
A
UDIO  
-
R
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction rules that apply in your country  
or area.  
60˚  
Remote  
control  
• Do not recharge, short-circuit, heat, burn or disas-  
semble batteries.  
VCR/DVD recorder Switching  
Because this product is a combination of aVCR and a DVD recorder, you must select first which com-  
ponent you wish to operate with the SELECT button.  
SELECT button  
VCR MODE  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
OPEN/  
POWER  
Press theVCR button on the remote control.  
(Verify that theVCR SELECT indicator is lit.)  
CLOSE  
CHANNEL  
DUBBING  
SELECT  
REW  
F
.FWD STOP/EJECT PLA  
Y
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
RECORD  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR  
DVD  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
DVD MODE  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
SELECT  
Press the DVD button on the remote control.  
(Verify that the DVD SELECT indicator is lit.)  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
DVD  
VCR  
DVD button  
VCR button  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Note  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Pressing only the SELECT button on the  
front panel DOES NOT switch the mode of  
the remote control.You MUST select the  
correct mode on the remote control.  
Pressing the SETUP or theVCR Plus+ but-  
ton switches the unit to the DVD mode.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
DVD SELECT  
indicator  
PAUSE  
VCR SELECT  
indicator  
9
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Guide to On Screen Menu  
This unit uses the following types of display for most operations. SETUP/DISC/CD menu,Title list, and DIS-  
PLAY, which allows you to change the playing status of disc during play. DISPLAY also gives you some disc  
information for checking the status of the disc.  
SETUP/DISC/CD menu  
Press SETUP button to display the setup main menu, then choose either of SETUP/DISC/CD by pressing { /  
buttons.Then, press ENTER button to display each menu.  
B
This provides entries to all main functions of the unit.  
“SETUP” is available only in “DISC” is available only when a DVD-R/RW  
“CD” is available only when  
an Audio CD disc or a CD-  
R/RW disc with MP3 files is  
inserted into the unit.  
the Stop mode.  
disc is inserted into the unit.  
When a DVD-Video disc (commercially available),  
a new DVD-R disc or the finalized DVD-R disc is  
inserted into the unit, you cannot select “DISC”.  
Setup Menu  
Disc Setting  
CD Playback Mode  
CD Playback Mode  
Setup  
Disc  
Edit  
Random Play  
Program Play  
Format  
Finalize  
1
2
5
3
6
Disc Protect OFF ON  
1 2 3 4  
1 2  
4
Playback Setting  
1. Playback:  
To set up the unit to play discs as  
you prefer.  
1. Edit:  
1. Random Play:  
To set the random play program-  
ming.  
Turns on a title list, (When a disc  
withVR mode is inserted,  
2. Recording:  
'Original' or 'PlayList' is available.), 2. Program Play(Audio CD  
To set up the unit to record to  
discs or tapes as you prefer.  
3. Display:  
which shows the recorded titles  
on the disc.  
2. Format:  
only):  
To set the program playing.  
To set up the OSD screen as you  
prefer.  
4. SelectVideo:  
To choose a line input to record  
to DVD discs from other video  
equipment.  
Allows you to erase all of the  
recorded content on the disc.  
The disc will be completely blank.  
3. Finalize:  
Allows you to finalize a disc  
recorded titles.  
5. Clock:  
To set up the clock of the unit as  
you need.  
4. Disc Protect (VR mode  
only) :  
Allows you to protect a disc from  
accidental editing or recording.  
6. Channel:  
To make the channel setting of  
the unit as you prefer.  
10  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
DISPLAY menu  
1. Indicates a disc type and a  
format mode.  
5. Each icon means:  
DVD mode  
: Search  
DVD  
First:  
Note:  
: Audio  
In some descriptions on this  
manual, only one disc type is  
indicated as an example.  
2. Indicates a recording mode  
and possible recording time  
left.  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.This menu will  
give you the information on the  
playing disc. Some operations are  
available while disc is playing.  
: Subtitle  
: Angle (exceptVR mode)  
: Repeat  
: Marker  
3. Indicates a current channel  
number.  
4. Indicates a title number, chap-  
ter number and the time  
elapsed of disc play.  
: Noise Reduction  
: Zoom  
Details are on page 46.  
4
1
: Spatializer  
DVD-RW  
1
1
00:00:00  
Video mode  
SP 1:25 Rem.  
CH 1  
2
3
5
VCR mode  
1. Playback status of the current  
tape.  
VCR  
First:  
2. Indicates a current channel  
number and an audio status of  
the program.  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.  
3. Indicates a recording speed  
only five seconds.  
1
2
4. Indicates a Tape Counter.  
5. Audio status of the current  
tape.  
CH21  
SP  
0:00:00  
HIFI  
3
4
5
11  
Before you start  
Functional overview (cont’d)  
Guide to Displays on the front panel  
4
2
1
6
3
7
5
1. Current status of the unit  
: Appears when a disc or a  
tape play is paused.  
: Appears when playing a  
disc or a tape.  
2. Disc type and Current  
3. Recording speed  
Indicates the recording speed of  
the disc or the tape.  
4. Title/Track and Chapter  
mark  
status of the unit  
:
Appears when an audio CD  
or a disc with MP3 files is  
inserted in the disc tray.  
Appears when a DVD disc  
is inserted in the disc tray.  
Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in  
DVD.  
: Appears when the timer  
programming has been  
set and is proceeding.  
: Appears during recording  
process.  
:
: Appears when indicating  
a title/track number.  
: Appears when indicating  
a chapter number.  
:
Appears when DVD is in  
the timer recording stand-  
by mode.  
5. Displays the following  
• Playing time / remaining time  
• Current title / chapter / track  
number  
• Recording time  
• Clock  
• Channel number  
Appears during repeat  
play.  
:
:
Appears when a tape is in  
the unit.  
Appears when a DVD-R disc  
is inserted in the disc tray.  
:
Appears when a DVD-  
RW disc is inserted in  
the disc tray.  
Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in  
VCR.  
• VCR tape counter  
• OTR remaining time  
:
6.  
: Appears in the after-  
noon with the clock  
displaying.  
Appears whenVCR is in  
the timer recording stand-  
by mode.  
7.  
:
Appears when the pro-  
gressive scan system is  
activated.  
:
Appears duringVCR to DVD  
duplication process.  
:
Appears during DVD toVCR  
duplication process.  
1. Appears when the disc tray is  
Display message  
opening.  
1
3
4
2. Appears when the disc tray is  
closing.  
3. Appears when a disc is loading  
in the disc tray.  
2
4. Appears when recording data  
is writing on to the disc.  
12  
Connections  
Connection to aTV  
(Back ofTV)  
Antenna  
Antenna  
Cable  
Signal  
Cable  
Signal  
(Back ofTV)  
3
or  
or  
Connect  
RF Cable  
(supplied)  
1
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Disconnect  
IN  
DVD  
AUDIO  
Y
L
L
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
PB/  
R
R
L
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
CB  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
2
PR/  
CR  
R
OUT  
Connect  
(Back of this unit)  
4
Plug in the AC power cord of this unit.  
Make one of the following connections, depending on the capabilities of your existing equipment.  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Good picture  
Basic Audio  
Better picture  
Best picture  
TV  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO IN  
Y
PB/CB  
P
R/CR  
Video  
cable  
(supplied)  
S-Video  
cable  
(commercially  
Audio cable  
(supplied)  
Component  
Video cables  
(commercially  
available)  
available)  
This unit  
DVD  
COMPONENT  
DVD/VCR  
DVD/VCR  
VIDEO OUT  
Y
AUDIO OUT  
DVD  
L
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
DVD  
AUDIO  
Y
L
L
S-VIDEO  
CB  
P
B
P
/
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
P
/
R
L
R
R
L
CB  
P
B
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
CR  
R
/
R
VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
CR  
R
/
OUT  
or  
COMPONENTVIDEO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO OUT  
DVD  
AUDIO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
DVD  
Y
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
P
/
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
CB  
B
L
L
IN  
P
/
CR  
R
R
OUT  
R
These jacks are useful  
only in DVD mode.  
AUDIO OUT  
Note  
• Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the A/V cables are connected to aVCR, pictures may be distorted  
due to the copy protection system.  
Method 2 and method 3 are only useful in DVD mode.  
If yourTV is compatible with 525p (480p) progressive scanning and you want  
to enjoy that high quality picture;  
RETURN  
SETUP  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
You must select the connection Method 3 above and progressive scanning mode.To set  
the mode, press and hold the SETUP button on the remote control for more than 3 sec-  
onds during DVD playback, so that “P.SCAN” will appear on the display of this unit.  
If yourTV is not compatible with progressive scanning;  
Use this unit in interlace mode. Make sure that no “P.SCAN” is on the display of this unit.  
If not, press and hold the SETUP button on the remote control for more than 3 seconds  
during DVD playback, so that “P.SCAN” on the display of this unit will disappear.  
REC  
SLOW  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
more than 3 seconds  
during DVD playback  
[Interlace mode]  
[Progressive scanning mode]  
13  
Connections  
Connection to a cable box or satellite box  
(Back of this unit)  
Connection A  
(Cable box or  
Satellite box)  
DVD/VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
RF Cable  
(supplied)  
Cable  
Signal  
(Back of TV)  
Select this connection when you want to view or record a scrambled channel.With this connection, channels cannot be  
changed on this unit.You can view or record ONLY the channels you have selected on the cable box or the satellite box.  
• While you are recording, only the recorded channel can be viewed.  
If you use theVCR Plus+ programming system, set the Cable/TV channel to 03 or 04 (Cable Box/DBS output  
channel) for everyVCR Plus+channel in the Channel Line-Up Chart.You must set the Cable Box/DBS to the  
channel you want to record; leave the Cable Box/DBS on for the timer recording. (Refer to page 20.)  
To select channels of the cable box or satellite box  
1) Turn on this unit by pressing POWER button.Then, press the CHANNEL buttons to select channel 3 or 4  
(the same channel as the output channel of the cable box or satellite box).  
• If noise appears on the TV screen, pressVIDEO/TV button on the remote control.  
• If you use the channel 4, you will need to change this unit’s RF output to channel 4. Refer to “RF converter  
output” on page 104.  
2) At the TV, select channel 3 or 4 (the same channel as you have selected at step 1).  
3) At the cable box or satellite box, select the channel you want to view or record.  
(Back of this unit)  
Connection B  
DVD/VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
(Cable box or  
Satellite box)  
OUT  
Cable  
Signal  
IN  
OUT  
(Back of TV)  
RF Cable  
RF Cable (supplied)  
Select this connection when you want to change channels on this unit.With this connection, you may watch  
one channel while recording another.  
You may not view or record a scrambled channel.  
To select channels of the cable box or satellite box  
1) At the cable box or satellite box, select channel 3 or 4 (the same channel as this unit’s RF output channel.)  
• Refer to “RF converter output” on page 104.  
2) At the TV, select the same channel as the output channel (3 or 4) of the cable box or satellite box.  
3) Turn on this unit by pressing POWER button. Then select the channel you want to view or record.  
• If noise appears on the TV screen, pressVIDEO/TV button on the remote control.  
To playback a DVD disc or a tape  
Before trying to playback DVD or tape, you MUST steps 1) to 2) above.  
• Refer to “Playback” on pages 47-48, 98.  
To view one channel while recording another  
1) While you are recording on this unit, pressVIDEO/TV button.  
2) At the cable box or satellite box, select the channel you want to view.  
Note to the Cable TV System Installer :  
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the  
National Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding - in particular, specifying that the  
cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable  
entry as possible.  
14  
Connections  
Connection to an Audio System  
• When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off.  
• Refer to each owner’s manual for further information on other devices.  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Stereo system  
Dolby Digital decoder, DTS  
decoder, MD deck or DAT deck  
Analog audio  
input jacks  
AUDIO  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
Digital audio  
input jacks  
Audio Optical  
Digital cable  
(commercially  
Audio Coaxial  
Digital cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Audio cable  
(supplied)  
or  
available)  
This unit  
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
DVD  
DIGITAL  
L
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
R
or  
Note  
DVD  
AUDIO  
• If output is Dolby Digital encoded audio, connect  
to a Dolby Digital decoder and set “Dolby Digital”  
to “Stream” for the “Digital Out” setting in the  
SETUP menu. (Refer to pages 94-95.)  
OUT  
L
R
If output is DTS encoded audio, connect to a DTS  
decoder and set “DTS” to “ON” for the “Digital Out”  
setting in the SETUP menu. (Refer to pages 94-95.)  
(usefull only in  
DVD mode)  
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel surround format cannot be recorded as  
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
Unless connected to a Dolby Digital decoder or a DTS  
decoder, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” and “DTS” to “OFF”  
for the “Digital Out” setting in the SETUP menu. Playing a  
DVD using incorrect settings may generate noise distortion  
and may also damage the speakers. (Refer to pages 94-95.)  
• Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” for the “Digital Out”  
setting in the SETUP menu for connecting to an  
MD deck or DAT deck. (Refer to pages 94-95.)  
By hooking this unit up to a Multi-channel Dolby Digital  
decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel surround sound as heard in the movie theaters.  
By hooking this unit up to the DTS decoder, you can enjoy  
5.1 channel surround system which reproduces the original  
sound as truthfully as possible. 5.1 channel surround system  
is developed by the DigitalTheater System, Inc.  
Optical cable (not supplied)  
• Optical cable (not supplied) may be damaged when bent at sharp angles. Ensure cables are coiled in loops with a  
diameter of 15 cm or more when storing them.  
• Use a cable which is 3 m or shorter.  
• Insert cable plugs firmly into the connectors when making connections.  
• If a plug has minor scratches or is dirty, clean it with a soft cloth before inserting it into a connector.  
15  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording  
The following will help you to understand easily how to record to DVD discs.  
Note:  
Make sure batteries are in the remote control and you have connected this unit and the TV correctly.  
Step 1: Choose a disc type  
Step 2:  
Insert a blank  
disc  
Step 3:  
Select the  
There are several types of recordable  
DVD discs to choose from. Choose a  
recordable DVD disc type based on  
your playing/recording/editing require-  
ments. See “DVD disc type” below.  
This unit can record on the follow-  
ing type of discs only.  
Recording speed  
Turn on the unit  
1
2
3
Select the DVD  
mode  
1
Open the disc tray  
Close the disc tray  
Select the recording  
speed  
2
Remote Control  
(or)  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
1
OPEN/  
2
POWER  
CLOSE  
* This unit cannot record on the fol-  
lowing discs.  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
1
RETURN  
SETUP  
SEARCH  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x CPRM com-  
patible  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
For example, when you want to  
record repeatedly on the same disc,  
or when you want to edit the disc  
after recording, select the  
rewritable DVD-RW type disc.  
When you want to save recordings  
without any alteration, a non-  
rewritable DVD-R can be your  
choice.  
STOP  
PLAY  
2
REW  
FWD  
3
PAUSE  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
SP 2:01 Rem.  
Loading  
This operation may  
take a while to be  
recognized.  
DVD disc types  
Format the disc  
Insert the disc in the unit.  
Then format the disc from  
SETUP menu.Video format  
(Video mode) orVideo  
recording format (VR mode)  
will be available depending on  
the disc type inserted.  
This is necessary to pre-  
pare the disc for record-  
ing. Details are on pages  
30-32.  
*When you format, the entire  
contents on that disc will be  
erased.  
16  
Getting started  
Easy DVD recording (Cont’d)  
Step 4:  
Select the desired  
channel  
Step 5:  
Record to DVD  
discs  
Step 6:  
Stop the Record  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
STOP  
PLAY  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
D
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
SEARCH  
MODE  
RETURN  
SETUP  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
C.RESET MONITOR  
STOP  
PLAY  
Writing to Disc  
SKIP  
CH  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FWD  
CH 1  
This operation may take  
a while to be completed.  
I
Hint 1: Play the recorded contents  
Start Rec.  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
You can select the title you want to play from a displayed menu and  
immediately start to play. Recorded contents are very accessible on  
a disc, the procedure is really simple as you choose a title on a  
chapter from the menu screen.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
What are titles and chapters?  
The contents of DVD disc are generally divided into titles.Titles may  
be further subdivided into chapters.  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Hint 2: Edit the recorded disc  
You will find editing discs very easy.This unit offers convenient edit functions, which are possible only with  
DVD-R/RW discs.  
You can edit the following from a title list.  
• Putting names on titles  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (VR mode)  
• Setting/clearing chapter markers  
• Deleting parts of titles or scenes (VR mode)  
Title Delete :This deletes an entire scene permanently from the disc.  
Scene Delete :This allows a user to edit within a specific scene (ex. commercials).  
Original and Playlist (VR mode)  
You can edit the recordings in Playlist without changing the original recordings. A Playlist does not take up  
much disc space.  
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?  
Throughout this manual, you will find Original and Playlist to refer to the actual content and the edited version.  
Original content refers to what’s actually recorded on the disc.  
Playlist content refers to the edited version of the disc; how the Original content is to be played.  
Finalizing a Disc  
• This will allow a disc that is recorded on our unit to be played back on a different DVD player- without  
finalization it will not be playable on another player.  
After finalizing a disc if the recording was in video mode, you can not edit any information that is on that disc.  
• If you have recorded inVR mode on DVD-RW disc then editing is still permitted after finalizing.  
17  
Getting started  
Channel setting  
All channels are stored in the unit  
when purchased.We recommend  
that you program available chan-  
nels in your area using “Auto  
Preset” in the Channel Preset of  
the SETUP menu.  
4
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SETUP menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Getting channels auto-  
matically  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Setup  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
1
4
5
6
Press POWER button to turn  
on the unit.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Playback Setting  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
3
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
5
Turn theTV on and be sure  
to select the input to which  
the unit is connected.  
Select “Channel” using K /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
L
/
To select a channel  
You can select a channel by  
directly entering channel using  
the Number buttons on the  
remote control.  
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
Auto Preset  
Notes for using the  
Number buttons:  
Manual Preset  
Guide Channel Setting  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
• When selecting cable channels  
which are higher than 99,  
enter channel numbers as a  
three-digit number.(For exam-  
ple: 117, press 1,1,7)  
You must precede single-digit  
channel numbers with a zero  
(For example: 02, 03, 04 and  
so on).  
6
3
Select “Auto Preset” using  
K
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
The unit will start getting chan-  
nels available in your area.  
You can select the line input  
mode (“L1” or “L2”).To select  
“L1” by pressing [0],[0],[1].To  
select “L2” by pressing  
CH 18  
[0],[0],[2].Details are on page 41.  
Auto Presetting Now  
Note  
• If the auto presetting is can-  
celled during presetting, some  
channels not yet preset may  
not be received.  
Setup Menu  
• The selection will depend on  
how you receive the TV chan-  
nels.  
To cancel the auto preset-  
ting during scanning:  
Press RETURN button or  
SETUP button to cancel.  
7
Press SETUP button to exit.  
You can select only the channels  
memorized in this unit by using  
the CHANNEL buttons.  
18  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
Adding/deleting channels  
4
The channels you no longer  
Select “Manual Preset” using  
receive or seldom watch can be  
deleted from the memory.You also  
may add channels into memory.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Manual Preset menu will appear.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Setup > Channel Preset > Manual Preset  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
CH2  
Add  
Delete  
MENU/LIST  
2
3
4
5
6
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
7
5
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select the channel number to  
add or delete.  
STOP  
PLAY  
Setup Menu  
Press { button to move to a  
lower channel number.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Press B button to move to a  
higher channel number.  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Setup > Channel Preset > Manual Preset  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
CH18  
Add  
Delete  
Setup  
6
Playback Setting  
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
3
The channel number will be  
added or deleted from the chan-  
nel memory.Then next channel  
number will appear so that you  
can continue adding or deleting  
channels.  
Select “Channel” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
Auto Preset  
Manual Preset  
7
Guide Channel Setting  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
19  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
Guide channel setting  
Channel Line-Up Chart  
First, fill in the boxes on this page:  
1.  
Call letters  
Guide Channel  
TV Channel  
(Local TV station)  
(Guide channel number)  
(Local channel number)  
Write your local channel numbers in “TV Channel”  
column, which you can receive in your area by chan-  
nel preset.  
2.  
Write local TV stations corresponding TV Channel in  
“Call letters” column, and write guide channel num-  
bers corresponding call letters in “Guide Channel”  
column, consulting your TV guide magazine or the  
TV listings of your local newspaper.  
Remember:  
If your cable box or satellite box is connected as in  
“Connection A” on page 14,TV Channel number  
must be channel 3 or 4 for every guide channel  
number.  
Now, compare the channel numbers you have writ-  
ten in the Guide Channel and TV Channel columns.  
You must set all of these channel numbers that don’t  
match using the following procedure before you pro-  
gram the automatic timer recording using theVCR  
Plus+ system.  
• This setting only needs to be set once, but must  
be done again if you have moved to a different  
area and channel numbers have been changed.  
OPEN/  
Setup  
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
Screen:  
ZOOM  
Playback Setting  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
3
Select “Channel” using K /  
L
2
3
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
ENTER button.  
Setup Menu  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
2
Auto Preset  
STOP  
PLAY  
Manual Preset  
Select SETUP using { /  
B
REW  
FWD  
Guide Channel Setting  
PAUSE  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
20  
Getting started  
Channel setting (cont’d)  
4
6
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Guide Channel  
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
Setting” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Guide Channel Setting list will  
appear.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Setup> Channel Preset> Guide Channel Setting  
Guide Channel :  
TV Channel  
CH1  
MENU/LIST  
1
2
3
4
5
6
:
:
:
:
:
:
CH---  
CH---  
CH---  
CH---  
CH---  
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
6
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
Assign channel numbers to  
the guide channels as neces-  
sary.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Look in your TV guide to see  
which channel numbers should be  
assigned to which guide channels.  
1.  
Choose a guide channel num-  
ber using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A cursor will move to a TV chan-  
nel.  
If the channel you wish to set is  
not on the screen, press { /  
B
buttons to change the displayed  
page until you reach the correct  
page.  
2.  
Select an external input (L)  
or CATV/TV (CH) using { /  
B buttons.  
3.  
Enter aTV channel using K /  
L buttons or number buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The channel number is assigned.  
To continue assigning, repeat the  
steps 1-3.  
Note  
To erase a TV channel, press  
{ button at step 5-3.  
21  
Getting started  
Selecting theTV stereo or SAP  
You can select a sound channel to  
output from TV. Stereo” has  
been selected as the default.  
4
Select “TV Audio Select”  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Auto Preset  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Manual Preset  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Guide Channel Setting  
MENU/LIST  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
SAP  
2
3
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
Setup Menu  
5
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select “Stereo” or “SAP”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
2
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Stereo:  
Outputs main-audio.  
SAP:  
SETUP menu will appear.  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
Outputs sub-audio.  
Refer to the item in “Glossary”  
on page 106 for more informa-  
tion.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
6
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Notes onTV channel audio  
• When you record a TV program which has Stereo and Secondary  
Audio Programs on a DVD-RW/R or a tape, you have to select the  
TV channel audio (Stereo or SAP) beforehand. Only the selected  
channel audio will be recorded. Refer to the following table to  
check an appropriate setting.  
3
Select “Channel” using K /  
/{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
L
Channel Preset menu will appear.  
Selected  
Broadcast  
Disc/tape  
Audio  
Setup > Channel Preset VCR DVD  
audio  
audio  
recording  
output  
Auto Preset  
Stereo  
SAP  
STEREO+SAP STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
STEREO+SAP SAP  
STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
SAP  
Manual Preset  
Guide Channel Setting  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
STEREO  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO  
• As can be seen in the above table, if your TV channel audio is set to  
SAP and the recorded TV program has Stereo and Secondary Audio  
Programs, you can only view the program in the sub-audio.  
22  
Getting started  
Clock setting  
Set the clock before you try the  
timer recording. If a Public  
Broadcasting Station (PBS) is available  
in your area, follow Auto Clock  
Setting below. If not, follow Manual  
Clock Setting on pages 24-25.  
4
Select “Auto Clock Setting”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
7
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Option window will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Auto Clock Setting  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Make sure  
• The antenna/cable TV connec-  
tions are correct.  
• If this unit is connected to a  
Cable Box or Satellite Box, select  
the local PBS station on them to  
set the clock automatically.  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Daylight Saving Time  
Manual  
MENU/LIST  
2
3
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
5
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
If you do not know your  
PBS channel number, select  
“Auto” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
If you know your PBS chan-  
nel number, select “Manual”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Setup Menu  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
Set Channel No.  
Auto Clock Setting  
2
CH1  
Daylight Saving Time  
Manual  
Select  
SETUP  
using { /  
B
but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Enter your PBS channel  
number using Number or  
K
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playback Setting  
6
Note  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
3
• The clock may set itself auto-  
matically after you connect the  
antenna/cable signal to this  
unit and plug in the power  
cord. In this case, the current  
time will appear on the display  
of the front panel.  
• If the current time is not dis-  
played or the displayed clock  
is not correct, set the clock  
manually.  
Select “Clock” using K / L / { /  
buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Clock menu will appear.  
B
7
Press POWER button to turn  
off the unit.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
This unit will search for the time  
only when the power is off. Leave  
it off for several minutes to give  
this unit time to set the clock on  
the display of the front panel.  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
23  
Getting started  
Clock setting (cont’d)  
Manual Clock Setting  
4
Select “Clock Setting” using  
1
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A clock setting window will  
appear.  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
MENU/LIST  
Daylight Saving Time  
- - - / - - / - - - - ( - - - )  
- - : - -  
2
3
4
5
6
Setup Menu  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Press ENTER button again.  
Default date will appear.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
STOP  
PLAY  
5
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Enter the date (month / day /  
year) using K / L buttons.  
Press { / B buttons to move  
the cursor.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
Daylight Saving Time  
JAN / 12 / 2004 (MON)  
12 : 00AM  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Clock” using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
6
Enter the time (hour /  
minute) using K / L buttons.  
Press { / B buttons to move  
the cursor.  
Clock menu will appear.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
ON  
Daylight Saving Time  
JAN / 12 / 2004 (MON)  
09 : 24 AM  
Note  
Your clock setting will be lost if  
either there is a power failure  
or this unit has been unplugged  
for more than 30 seconds  
when you set the clock manu-  
ally.  
24  
Getting started  
Clock setting (cont’d)  
7
8
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Although seconds are not displayed,  
they begin counting from zero.  
Press K / L buttons to select  
AM or PM, then press ENTER  
button.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Clock menu will appear, then the  
settings will be activated.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
MENU/LIST  
7
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
8
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
When “Auto Clock Setting” is selected to “Auto” or  
“Manual”, change it to “OFF” as following steps.  
Repeat steps (1) to (3) in “Manual Clock Setting”.  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
4
5
4
5
RETURN  
SETUP  
Select “Auto Clock Setting”  
Select “OFF” using K /  
L
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
6
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
6
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Clock Setting  
OFF  
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
Daylight Saving Time  
Manual  
25  
Getting started  
Clock setting (cont’d)  
Setting the daylight sav-  
ing time  
4
When Daylight Saving Time is  
ON, the clock will automatically  
move forward one hour on the  
first Sunday in April and move  
back one hour on the last Sunday  
in October.  
Select “Daylight Saving  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Time” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Daylight Saving Time options will  
appear.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Clock  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Clock Setting  
1
Auto Clock Setting  
Auto  
MENU/LIST  
Daylight Saving Time  
ON  
OFF  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
Select “ON” or “OFF” using  
STOP  
PLAY  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Setup Menu  
Choose “ON” when currently  
observing the daylight saving time.  
2
6
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Press SETUP button to exit.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Clock” using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Clock menu will appear.  
Setup > Clock  
VCR DVD  
Clock Setting  
Auto Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
Auto  
ON  
26  
Getting started  
Selecting theTV aspect ratio  
You can select the TV aspect ratio  
Playback menu will appear.  
to match the formats of what you  
are playing with the unit and your  
TV screen (4:3 standard or 16:9  
widescreen TV).  
“4:3 Letter Box” has been select-  
ed as the default.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
OPEN/  
POWER  
Parental Lock  
CLOSE  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
OFF  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
MENU/LIST  
4
Select “TV Aspect” using K /  
L buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
2
3
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Option window will appear.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
Parental Lock  
4:3 Pan & Scan  
16:9 Wide  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
STOP  
PLAY  
Original  
OFF  
REW  
FWD  
Setup Menu  
PAUSE  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
2
Refer to the Note on this  
page.  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
5
SETUP menu will appear.  
Select a desired option using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Setup  
6
Press SETUP button to exit.  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K /  
L
/
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Note  
If you have a standardTV:  
Select “4:3 Letter Box”, so that  
black bars appear on the top  
and bottom of the screen.  
Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a  
full height picture with both  
sides trimmed.  
If you have a widescreenTV:  
Select “16:9 Wide”.  
27  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording  
Information  
Recording speed  
You can select a recording speed among 6 options,  
and the recording time will depend on the record-  
ing speed you select as follows.  
This unit can record to DVD-R and DVD-RW discs.  
When recording, you will need to select a recording  
format betweenVideo mode andVR mode depend-  
ing on the disc format.The disc format for DVD-R  
is always “Video format,so a recording format will  
be “Video mode”.  
On the other hand, when recording to DVD-RW, a  
recording format will be “Video mode” or “VR  
mode” because a disc format is available between  
“Video Recording format” and “Video format” for  
DVD-RW.  
Recording Recording  
Video/Sound Quality  
speed  
time *  
XP (1H)  
60 min  
SP (2H)  
LP (4H)  
EP (6H)  
120 min  
240 min  
360 min  
Logo  
Attributes  
12cm, single-sided, single layer disc  
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):  
600 minutes (4.7GB)  
SLP (8H) 480 min  
DVD-RW  
SEP (10H) 600 min  
12cm, single-sided, single layer disc  
Approx. max. recording time (SEP mode):  
600 minutes (4.7GB)  
*This table is designed for a new single-sided 12cm  
disc as the standard.The recording time are esti-  
mates and actual recording time may differ.  
*The audio and video quality is getting poorer as  
the recording time becomes longer.  
DVD-R  
*This unit cannot record on the following discs.  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0/8x  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2/2-4x CPRM compatible  
AboutVideo mode andVR (Video Recording)  
mode  
Restrictions on recording  
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
unit. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video  
discs and some satellite broadcasts.  
If copy-protected material is encountered during a  
recording, the unit will pause or stop automatically  
and an error message will be displayed on-screen.  
Video that is “copy-once only” can only be recorded  
using a DVD-RW disc inVR mode with CPRM (see  
below).  
Video mode is the same recording format as DVD-  
Video discs purchased locally, so that you can play in  
most DVD players.To play in other DVD players,  
you will need to finalize (see page 44). If not final-  
ized, you can play, record additionally or edit discs  
recorded inVideo mode with this unit.  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a basic recording  
format for DVD-RW.You can record and edit  
repeatedly.  
DVD players with  
DVD-RW recorded inVR mode.  
are capable of playing  
When recording a TV broadcast or through an  
external input, you can display copy control informa-  
tion on screen.  
Disc type Disc format Functions  
What is “CPRM”?  
CPRM is a copy protection system with scram-  
ble system regarding the recording of “copy  
once” broadcast programs. CPRM stands for  
Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means  
that you can record copy-once broadcast pro-  
grams, but you cannot then make a copy of  
those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be  
made on DVD-RW discs formatted inVR  
mode, and CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible with  
CPRM.  
Video mode  
Video  
Playing, limited recording,  
limited editing  
DVD-RW  
VR mode  
VR  
Playing, recording,  
Original/Playlist editing  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
Playing, limited recording,  
limited editing  
DVD-R  
28  
Recording  
Information on DVD recording (cont’d)  
Information on copy control  
Making discs playable in other DVD  
player (Finalize)  
Some satellite broadcasts include copy-protected  
information. For recording these, refer to the fol-  
lowing.  
After recording, you must finalize a disc in order to  
play on any other unit. (Refer to page 44.)  
Copy-  
prohibited  
Disc type / format  
Copy-free Copy-once  
ver.1.1  
VR  
DVD-RW  
Playable  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
ver.1.1  
Video  
DVD-RW  
This Unit  
DVD player  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
Not Playable  
ver.2.0  
DVD-R  
Recordable  
Not Recordable  
After finalizing:  
• Once DVD-R/RW (Video mode) is finalized, you  
cannot record additionally or edit.  
• Even if DVD-RW (VR mode) is finalized, you can  
record additionally to or edit.  
• When DVD-R/RW (Video mode) is finalized, title  
menu will be created automatically.  
Note  
• The audio and video quality gets poorer as the  
Recording time becomes longer.  
This unit cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
• DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW discs recorded on a  
personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder  
may not play if the disc is damaged or dirty or if  
there is dirt or condensation on the unit’s lens.  
• If you record a disc using a personal computer,  
even if it is recorded in a compatible format,  
there are cases in which it may not play because  
of the settings of the application software used  
to create the disc. (Check with the software pub-  
lisher for more detailed information.)  
To play in other DVD players, finalize discs record-  
ed on this unit with the following condition.  
Disc type  
Mode  
DVD-R  
ver.2.0  
Video mode  
DVD-RW  
Video mode  
VR mode  
ver.1.1  
ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
• Discs recorded inVideo mode on this unit can-  
not record additionally using other DVD  
recorders.  
29  
Recording  
Formatting a disc  
Settings for the recording format to a blank disc  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
3
When inserting a blank disc, the  
unit starts to initialize the blank  
disc.  
After that, you can record to the  
disc with the recording format  
selected in SETUP menu.  
You are allowed to set a specified  
time for chapter marks.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Recording menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
10 minutes  
MENU/LIST  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
1
2
3
4
5
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “DVD-RW Recording  
REW  
FWD  
Format” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
PAUSE  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
Setup Menu  
Video mode  
DVD-RW Recording Form
Auto Chapter  
VR mode  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
2
Video mode  
DVD Player Compatibility mode.  
VR mode  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
Editing possibility mode.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Note  
Video mode has been selected as  
the default.  
• The recording format setting  
is effective only for DVD-RW  
discs.You cannot change the  
recording format on a DVD-R  
disc. DVD-R discs will always  
be inVideo mode.  
Setup  
5
Select “Video mode” or “VR  
mode” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The recording mode will be set.  
You cannot mix two for-  
mats on one DVD-RW disc.  
When you load a disc once  
recorded before, the  
Playback Setting  
recording format cannot be  
changed even if you change  
it in SETUP menu.  
• When inserting a blank  
DVD+R or DVD+RW disc,  
the error message ("Disc  
Error") will appear.This unit is  
not compatible with a  
DVD+R/RW disc.  
• PLAYLIST will be created  
automatically when recording  
on DVD-RW inVR mode.  
30  
Recording  
Formatting a disc (cont’d)  
6
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Auto Chapter” using  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
DVD-RW Recording Forma
Auto Chapter  
OFF  
5 minutes  
MENU/LIST  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
6
7
60 minutes  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
8
“10 minutes” has been selected as  
the default.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
7
PAUSE  
Select a desired time option  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Chapter marks will be put as you  
specified.  
8
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
Note  
• The time for chapter marks is  
not accurate inVideo mode.  
31  
Recording  
Formatting a disc (cont’d)  
Reformatting a disc  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
If you are using a DVD-RW disc,  
by default it will beVideo mode.  
You can change this toVR mode  
from SETUP menu.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Option window will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
Disc  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Edit  
MENU/LIST  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
2
3
4
5
Are you sure?  
Yes  
No  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
*VR mode only  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
Setup Menu  
REW  
FWD  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
PAUSE  
Formatting will start.  
2
Select “DISC” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
Disc  
Edit  
58%  
Format  
Formatting  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
6
Formatting is complete.  
*VR mode only  
100% will be indicated.  
3
Select “Format” using K /  
L
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
100%  
Formatting  
Disc  
Edit  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Format  
Finalize  
Note  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• When you reformat the disc,  
the contents of the disc will  
be erased.  
Yes  
No  
• If you want to cancel format  
at step 5, select “No”.  
*VR mode only  
32  
Recording  
Basic recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
4
Follow the steps below to record  
TV programs.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired channel to  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
DVD  
record using CH K / L but-  
tons or number buttons.  
First:  
SEARCH  
MODE  
4
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Turn on the unit and load a  
recordable disc.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
CH 1  
MENU/LIST  
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
2
6
5
4
2
Press REC/OTR button to  
start recording.  
Select a recording speed  
using REC SPEED button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
I mark will be displayed for 5  
seconds.  
PAUSE  
5
SP 2:01 Rem.  
I
Refer to “Recording speed” on  
page 28.  
To pause the recording, press  
Note  
PAUSE F button. Press REC/OTR  
button to restart the recording.  
• Recording starts immediately  
and continues until the disc  
becomes full or you stop  
recording.  
• When the clock setting has  
not been made, the space for  
a date and time of title names  
in the original or playlist will  
be blank.  
3
Make sure that the recording  
format is set to the desired  
mode.  
6
Press STOP C button to stop  
Refer to “Formatting a disc” on  
pages 30-32.  
the recording.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
When a DVD-RW disc is  
loaded:  
You cannot mix two for-  
mats on one DVD-RW disc.  
When you load a disc once  
recorded before, the  
You can chooseVideo mode or  
VR mode from SETUP menu.  
“Video mode” has been selected  
as the default. Refer to “Settings  
for the recording format to a  
blank disc” on pages 30-31.  
recording format cannot be  
changed even if you change  
it in SETUP menu.  
You cannot change the  
recording speed during the  
REC pause mode.  
You can change a channel  
during the REC pause mode.  
When a DVD-R disc is loaded:  
DVD-R discs will always be in  
Video mode.  
33  
Recording  
Basic recording (cont’d)  
Checking the recording picture quality  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
2
You can confirm the recording pic-  
ture quality with the recording  
speed you have selected before  
attempting to record to a DVD disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Press REC MONITOR button  
again to exit.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
1
2
While the unit is in STOP or  
REC with a DVD disc to  
record inserted, press REC  
MONITOR button.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
The TV program will be on the  
screen in the recording picture  
quality with the recording speed  
you have selected.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
1
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
CH 18  
Rec Monitor  
XP  
If you want to change the  
recording speed, press REC  
SPEED button repeatedly.  
The recording speed will be  
changed as you press the button  
as shown. Refer to “Recording  
speed” on page 28.  
You cannot change the record-  
ing speed during recording.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
Note  
You cannot check the record-  
ing sound quality with the  
Rec monitor function.  
34  
Recording  
One-touch timer recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
4
This is a simple way to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30  
minutes. Check that the disc you  
are recording onto has enough  
space for the time you set.  
When the recording finishes the  
recorder automatically goes into  
standby.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired channel to  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
record using CH K / L but-  
tons or number buttons.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
5
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Press REC/OTR button, then  
press REC/OTR button  
repeatedly until a desired  
recording time (30 minutes  
to 8 hours) appears on theTV  
screen.  
MENU/LIST  
DVD  
First:  
1
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Turn on the unit and load a  
recordable disc.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Recording will start.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
5
Make sure that the TV input is set  
on the unit.  
5
4
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
PAUSE  
0:30  
I
2
Select a recording speed  
using REC SPEED button.  
Refer to "Recording speed" on  
page 28.  
0:30  
(Normal Recording) 1:00  
8:00  
7:30  
3
When the unit reaches the speci-  
fied time, it will turn off automati-  
cally.  
Make sure that the recording  
format is set to the desired  
mode.  
Note  
Refer to "Formatting a disc" on  
pages 30-32.  
To cancel the one-touch timer  
recording within the specified  
time, press STOP C button.  
• The remaining recording time  
will appear on the display  
panel during an OTR. Press  
DISPLAY button to see it on  
the TV screen.  
You cannot pause an OTR.  
• The unit will turn off auto-  
matically under the conditions  
following.  
1)No space remained on the  
disc.  
2)When a power failure  
occurs.  
When a DVD-RW disc is  
loaded:  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
You can chooseVideo mode or  
VR mode from SETUP menu.  
"Video mode" has been selected  
as the default. Refer to pages 30-  
31 "Settings for the recording for-  
mat to a blank disc."  
When a DVD-R disc is loaded:  
DVD-R discs will always be in  
Video mode.  
• If OTR is finished in DVD  
during playback or REC mode  
inVCR, the DVD will be in  
STOP mode and theVCR  
keeps the current mode.  
35  
Recording  
Timer recording  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
You can choose the timer  
4
programming menu by press-  
ingVCR Plus+ button twice. In  
this case, continue with step 5.  
Select “Timer Programming”  
You can program the unit to record  
up to 8 programs, up to a year in  
advance. Daily or weekly program  
recordings are also available.  
• Be sure to set the clock before  
making a timer programming.  
• Insert a recordable disc or a  
tape with a record tab.  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Timer Programming list will  
appear.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
SEARCH  
MODE  
DVD  
Date  
- - -  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
- - -  
- - -  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
MENU/LIST  
5
Select the program which is  
2
3
4
5
6
7
not set up using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
6
STOP  
PLAY  
Enter the date using K /  
L
REW  
FWD  
buttons, then press B button.  
PAUSE  
Setup Menu  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
2
JAN / 01 - - : - -AM - - : - -AM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
e.g. January 1st  
SETUP menu will appear.  
JAN/01  
When pressing L button at the  
current date, timer recording  
mode will change as follows.  
Setup  
Daily  
MON-SAT  
MON-FRI  
SAT  
Playback Setting  
FRI  
Note  
3
If you have not set the  
clock yet:  
SUN  
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A clock setting window will  
appear after step 4. Continue  
with the step 4 in “Auto  
Clock Setting” on page 23 or  
“Manual Clock Setting” on  
page 24 before making a  
timer programming.  
• Press { or B buttons to  
move the cursor to the left  
and the right in the timer  
programming menu.  
DEC/31  
Recording menu will appear.  
7
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
Enter the time to start and  
to end using K / L buttons,  
then press B button.  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
10 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
JAN/12 10 :00PM - - : - -AM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
36  
Recording  
Timer recording (cont’d)  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
8
10  
12  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Select the channel number to  
record using K / L buttons,  
then press B button.  
Select a recording speed  
using K / L buttons.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
SPACE  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
ZOOM  
VCR  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD 1H  
- - -  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
MENU/LIST  
Refer to “Recording speed” on page  
28 for DVD or page 98 forVCR.  
To record from external input, L1  
or L2.  
8
9
10  
11  
Note  
11  
9
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Press ENTER button when all  
information required is  
entered.  
Select a recording media  
using K / L buttons, then  
press B button.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Your program setting will be  
stored.  
To set another program, repeat  
steps 5 to 11.  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD  
- - -  
• After step 12, the unit will be  
turned on automatically 2  
minutes (ForVCR recording,  
10 seconds) in advance of the  
recording time to start and  
waits to start.Then the  
To record on to a tape, selectVCR.  
To record on to a disc, select DVD.  
To exit, press SETUP button.  
12  
Press POWER button to turn off.  
indicator will appear on the  
front display.  
recording will start at the  
recording time you set.  
Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer programming  
information  
1
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
6
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
1
4
SEARCH  
MODE  
2
5
Press POWER button so that  
To clear the timer programming,  
select your desired program  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
indicator disappears from  
the front display.  
SPACE  
using K / L buttons, then press  
CLEAR/C.RESET button.  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
2
4
MENU/LIST  
To correct the timer program-  
ming, select your desired pro-  
PressVCR Plus+ button twice.  
Timer Programming list will appear.  
gram using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Next, correct the timer programming  
4
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
JAN/12 10:00PM 10:30PM CH8 DVD 1H  
- - -  
using K/L/{/B buttons.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Finally, press ENTER button again.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
REC/OTR  
3
Check the information on the  
list you will need.  
5
Note  
PressVCR Plus+ button to exit.  
• PressVCR Plus+ button to  
check the timer programming  
in process.  
When the timer recording is  
in process, that program will  
be red highlighted. In this case,  
you cannot select any other  
program.  
6
Press POWER button to return  
to the timer standby mode.  
To stop the timer recording in process  
On the front panel of the main unit, press STOP button to stop  
C
C
A
the disc recording or STOP/EJECT  
to stop the tape recording.  
C
STOP button on the remote control is not effective.  
37  
Recording  
Timer recording (cont’d)  
Hints for timer recording  
If there is a power failure or this unit has been unplugged for more than 30 seconds, the clock setting and all timer settings will be lost.  
• If a disc is not on the tray, the DVD indicator on the front panel flashes and timer recording cannot be performed.  
Please insert a recordable disc.  
• If a tape with a record tab is not in the cassette compartment, theVCR indicator on the front panel flashes and timer  
recording cannot be performed. Please insert a recordable tape.  
• When all the timer recording is completed, the  
indicator flashes.To play or eject the recorded disc (or the tape),  
A) button.  
press POWER button first and then press PLAY B or OPEN/CLOSE A (or STOP/EJECT  
C
• The timer recording is not performed in DVD andVCR at the same time. If you set two programmings with the same  
channel and time both in DVD andVCR, the programming that has priority will be recorded.  
• During timer recording or timer standby ( indicator is on the front display), any operations on the unit will not be  
available.To make these operations available, cancel the timer recording or timer standby first ( indicator disappears).  
To cancel the timer standby mode, press POWER button.  
• When the Start and the End time are the same, the length of the recording will be set for 24 hours.When the disc  
reaches at the end during the recording, the unit turns itself off.  
• When the programmed Start and End time are earlier than the current time, the recording will be set on the same  
date in the next year.  
If your programmed Start time for DVD recording is within 2 minutes from the current time, the power will turn on for recording  
standby right after you turn the power off. For a videotape recording, the power will turn on shortly before the Start time.  
• If a videotape ends during timer recording, the unit will stop, eject the videotape, and turn itself off.  
• When two or more programmings are overlapped,Overlap” will be displayed.  
The priority of overlapped settings  
This unit records the programs according to priority if the timer programmings are overlapped.The timer programming  
set previously has priority.  
A timer recording of lower priority will be canceled, start from the middle or stop on the way.  
Check the overlapped timer programmings and change the priority if necessary.  
A programming set previously has priority  
When some programming have been  
made at the end time of the  
programming currently being recorded:  
A program set previously (PROG. B) has priority.  
When the starting time is the same:  
A program set previously (PROG.A) has priority.  
ex.1  
ex. 2  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
PROG. C  
Actual  
recording  
Actual  
recording  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
When the recording time is partially overlapped:  
PROG.A will start after PROG. B is complete to be recorded.  
When the recording time is entirely overlapped:  
PROG. A will not be recorded.  
PROG.A  
PROG. A  
PROG. B  
Actual  
PROG. B  
Actual  
recording  
PROG. B  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
recording  
Note for DVD timer recording  
• When the recording time  
of two programs are over-  
lapped, or the End time of  
a program and the Start  
time of another is the  
same, the first 20-90 sec-  
onds of the subsequent  
program will be cut off.  
Example:  
When the end time of the programming currently  
being recorded and the starting time of the one to be recorded  
sequentially are same:  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
Actual  
PROG.A  
PROG. B  
recording  
The first 20-90 seconds will be cut off.  
38  
Recording  
®
Timer recording usingVCR Plus+ system  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
appear.  
DVD-R  
VCR  
OPEN/  
When the Guide channel has  
not been assigned:  
The CH area has been selected,  
then enter the channel number to  
POWER  
CLOSE  
6
1
5
TheVCR Plus+ system lets you  
set timer recordings very simply.  
Just enter the PlusCode number  
listed in the TV program guide.  
The date, time, and channel for  
the TV program to record will set  
automatically.  
Before setting timer recording  
usingVCR Plus+ system, read  
“Guide channel setting” on pages  
20-21.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
2
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
record using K / L buttons  
.
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Start  
End  
10:30PM  
CH  
Speed  
DVD 1H  
VCR  
JAN/12 10:00PM  
MENU/LIST  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
1
When the Guide channel has  
been assigned:  
The programming you made with  
VCR Plus+ system is hilighted to  
check.  
In stop mode, pressVCR  
Plus+ button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
VCR Plus+ setting menu will  
appear.  
PAUSE  
Screen:  
Setup > Recording > Timer Programming  
DVD  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
Speed  
VCR  
VCR Plus+  
JAN/12 10:00PM  
10:30PM CH8 DVD 1H  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Please enter a Plus Code No.  
Note  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
• Press { button to erase the  
latest number entered incor-  
rectly at step 2.  
• Press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to erase all numbers entered  
incorrectly at step 2.  
• If you enter an incorrect  
PlusCode number at step 2  
or the programming is not  
available, the error message  
“Code Error!” will appear.  
Enter the correct PlusCode  
number.  
Remember:  
If your cable box or satellite  
box is connected as in  
“Connection A” on page 14,  
TV Channel number must be  
channel 3 or 4 for every a  
guide channel number.Then,  
set your cable box or satellite  
box to the channel you want  
to record; leave your cable  
box or satellite box on for  
the timer recording.  
• If you want to change the set-  
ting, use K / L / { / B but-  
tons.  
Note:  
When eight timer recordings have  
been scheduled, the Timer  
Programming list will appear  
instead.  
4
Press ENTER button after  
you entered or confirm the  
information.  
YourVCR Plus+ program setting  
will be stored.  
2
Enter the PlusCode number  
correctly using number but-  
tons.  
5
VCR Plus+  
PressVCR Plus+ button to exit.  
Please enter a Plus Code No.  
1 2 3 4 -  
-
-
-
-
6
Press POWER button to  
return to the timer standby  
mode.  
3
Press ENTER button.  
The Timer Programming list will  
39  
Recording  
Settings for an external source  
Connection to an external source  
Connect the external source properly to the unit by using input jacks either LINE2 (Front) or LINE1 (Rear).  
When you want to record to a tape, use either DVD/VCRVIDEO IN jack (Rear) orVIDEO input jack  
(Front). S-VIDEO input is useful only in DVD mode.  
Use commercially available S-Video orVideo cable and an Audio cable for this connection.  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
Another source  
S -VIDEO  
VIDEO AUDIO  
S-VIDEO  
(VCR camcorder etc.)  
R
L
L
R
or  
or  
S-Video  
Video  
cable  
Audio  
cable  
S-Video  
cable  
Video  
Audio  
cable  
cable  
cable  
DVD/VCR  
AUDIO IN  
L
DVD  
S-VIDEO  
or  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
R
IN  
VIDEO IN  
To LINE 2 IN  
To LINE 1 IN  
OPEN/CLOSE  
POWER  
DD/VCR  
AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT ANTENNA  
COMPONE  
VIDEO OUT  
NT  
ENT  
T
IN  
DD  
AUDIO  
Y
L
L
DIGITAL  
CHANNEL  
DUBBING  
SELECT  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
REW  
F
.FWD STOP/EJECT PLA  
Y
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
RECORD  
S-VIDEO  
PB/  
CB  
L
R
R
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
-
AUDIO  
-
R
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
VCR  
DVD  
IN  
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT  
OUT  
PR/  
CR  
R
OUT  
Front of this unit  
Rear of this unit  
1. Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC 1. Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC  
menu.  
menu.  
2. Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
2. Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
3. Select “SelectVideo” using K / L / { / B but-  
3. Select “SelectVideo” using K / L / { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
Video In  
Video In  
Video In  
4. Select “L2 (Front)” using K / L buttons, then 4. Select “L1 (Rear)” using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
press ENTER button.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Video In  
S-Video In  
5. Select the input jack type to connect using K / 5. Select the input jack type to connect using K /  
L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
If you want to use S-VIDEO input, selectS-Video In”.  
If you want to useVIDEO input (Composite), select  
“Video In”.  
L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
If you want to use S-VIDEO IN, selectS-Video In”.  
If you want to useVIDEO IN (Composite), select  
“Video In”.  
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Select Video  
Setup > Select Video  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
L1 (Rear)  
L2 (Front)  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Video In  
S-Video In  
40  
Recording  
Settings for an external source (cont’d)  
Recording from an external source  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
Before recording from an external source, see the instructions for the connection on page 40.  
1. Turn theTV and the unit on, and be sure to select the input  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
of theTV to which the unit is connected.  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
2
3
DVD  
SEARCH  
MODE  
2. When you want to record to the disc: Press:  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Press OPEN/CLOSE A button to open the disc tray, then  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
place the disc to record properly.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
This operation may take a while to be recognized.  
MENU/LIST  
VCR  
When you want to record to a tape: Press:  
Insert the tape with a record tab into the cassette com-  
partment.  
3. Select the input of the unit which the external equipment is  
connected. (L2 or L1)  
To use the input jacks on the back of this unit, select “L1” position by  
pressing [0],[0],[1] on the remote control or the CH K / L buttons.  
To use the input jacks on the front of this unit, select “L2” position  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
7
5
3
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
by pressing [0],[0],[2] on the remote control or the CH K / L but-  
tons.  
PAUSE  
4. Select a recording speed using REC SPEED button. Refer to  
“Recording speed” on page 28 for DVD or page 98 forVCR.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
SP  
SLP  
SEP  
SLP  
DVD mode  
VCR mode  
5. Press REC/OTR button on the unit to start recording.  
6. Press PLAY button on the external source to record from.  
7. For disc:  
Press STOP C button on the unit to stop recording.  
This operation may take a while to be completed.  
For tape:  
Press STOP/EJECT  
ing.  
C
A button on the unit to stop record-  
41  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VCR  
2
Select “SETUP” using { /  
B
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
You can copy a DVD disc to a  
videotape or copy a videotape to  
a DVD disc.This function will be  
possible only if the DVD disc or  
the tape is not copy protected.  
Before starting this function, pre-  
pare for the recording on the  
DVD-R/RW disc or the videotape.  
Refer to pages 33-34, 98.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Setup  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
Playback Setting  
2
3
4
Make sure:  
• Insert a disc and a tape with a  
record tab.  
Note for recording to a tape:  
• The tape's record tab is intact.  
• The videotape is long enough to  
record the DVD disc.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
3
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
Select “Recording” using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
Recording menu will appear.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Note for recording to a disc:  
• The DVD disc is satisfied with  
the recording status. Refer to  
pages 28-29.  
DVD  
Setup > Recording  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
10 minutes  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
1
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
4
Select “Dubbing Mode” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Note  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
For VCR to DVD duplication:  
Setup Menu  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
OFF  
• After startingVCR to DVD  
duplication, the picture may be  
distorted because of the auto  
tracking function.  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR DVD  
This is not a malfunction. Be  
advised to playback the tape  
until the picture is stabilized,  
then set the starting point  
which you wish to start  
recording, and startVCR to  
DVD duplication.  
42  
Recording  
Dubbing Mode (cont’d)  
VCR to DVD  
DVD toVCR  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
5
5
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Select “VCR DVD” using  
K
Select “VCR DVD” using  
K
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
/
L buttons, then press  
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
ENTER button.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Recording  
VCR DVD  
MENU/LIST  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
DVD-RW Recording Format  
Auto Chapter  
Video mode  
OFF  
Video mode  
OFF  
5
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
Timer Programming  
Dubbing Mode  
VCRDVD
VCR DVD  
VCRDVD
VCR DVD  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
6
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
6
6
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
Press SETUP button to exit  
SETUP menu.  
9
PAUSE  
7
Make sure to select a recording  
speed using REC SPEED button.  
VCR  
Press:  
VCR  
Press:  
Make sure to select a recording  
speed using REC SPEED button.  
7-a  
7-b  
DVD  
Press:  
7-a  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press PLAY B button on the  
unit, and then press PAUSE  
button at the point you wish  
to start recording.  
CHANNEL  
DUBBING  
SELECT  
REW  
F.FWD STOP/EJECT PLAY  
RECORD  
STOP  
PLAY  
RECORD  
7-b  
DVD  
VCR  
Press PLAY B button on the  
unit, and then press PAUSE  
button at the point you wish  
to start recording.  
9-a  
9-b  
8
8
Press DUBBING button on  
the front of the unit.  
Note  
8
VCR to DVD duplication will start.  
• When you turn off the unit  
after setting the Dubbing  
Mode to  
Press DUBBING button on  
the front of the unit.  
DVD toVCR duplication will start.  
, the  
9-a  
setting will be set to  
Press STOP C button on the  
unit or STOP C button on  
the remote control to stop  
the recording.  
automatically.  
9-b  
• Dubbing Mode is available  
only if the tape or disc is not  
copy protected.  
You cannot change the output  
mode duringVCR to DVD or  
DVD toVCR duplication.  
Press STOP/EJECT  
ton on the unit or STOP  
button on the remote control  
to stop the recording.  
C
A but-  
C
For VCR to DVD duplication:  
• The playback sound mode is  
followed by the setting of  
VCR playback sound mode on  
page 100. Set the playback  
sound mode to which you  
wish to record to the DVD.  
43  
Recording  
Finalizing the discs  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
You will need to finalize discs  
recorded inVideo mode to play in  
other DVD players.  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc  
Edit  
MENU/LIST  
Format  
Finalize  
Finalizing may take several min-  
utes up to an hour. (A disc  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
2
3
4
recorded inVideo mode can take  
up to 15 minutes.A disc recorded  
inVR mode can take up to 60  
minutes.) A shorter recording  
period on the disc will require a  
longer time period for finalization.  
Do not unplug the power cord  
during finalization.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
*VR mode only  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Finalizing will start.  
REW  
FWD  
4
PAUSE  
Details are on pages 28-29.  
Note  
• Finalizing discs inVideo mode  
automatically creates title  
menus.  
• Once you have finalized a disc  
recorded inVideo mode, you  
cannot edit or record any-  
thing else on that disc.  
Discs recorded inVR mode can  
still be recorded and edited on  
this unit even after finalized.  
• When you insert a DVD-RW  
disc finalized with this unit,  
“Undo Finalize” will appear  
instead of “Finalize”.  
1
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
58%  
Finalizing  
To cancel finalizing, press STOP  
button.  
C
Do you want to cancel?  
Yes  
No  
Setup Menu  
58%  
Disc  
Finalizing  
Edit  
2
Format  
Select “Yes” using { / B buttons  
then press ENTER button.  
Finalizing is cancelled, then the  
unit will be in stop mode.  
,
Undo Finalize  
Select “DISC” using { /  
B
To release the finalizing for  
the disc, select “Undo  
Finalize” at step 3.  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
• If  
appear when pressing  
STOP buttonat step 4, you  
cannot cancel finalizing  
because the finalizing has  
been in certain progress.  
• When selecting “No” at step  
4, press ENTER or RETURN  
button, finalizing will be con-  
tinued.  
You cannot cancel finalizing  
the DVD-R disc once it has  
started.  
*DO NOT power off during  
finalizing, this will result in  
malfunction.  
Disc  
5
Edit  
Format  
Finalizing is complete.  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
*VR mode only  
100%  
3
Finalizing  
Select “Finalize” using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Option window will appear.  
44  
Recording  
Setting a disc to protect  
VR  
DVD-RW  
3
To prevent accidental recording,  
editing or erasing the titles, you  
can protect them from DISC  
menu.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Disc Protect OFF  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
ON” using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
Disc  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Edit  
MENU/LIST  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
2
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
REW  
FWD  
Setup Menu  
PAUSE  
A disc will be protected.  
2
Select “DISC” using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
58%  
Note  
Writing to Disc  
Disc  
• The Disc Protect setting is  
available only when a disc  
withVR mode is inserted.  
You can select only Disc  
Protect Menu when a pro-  
tected disc is inserted.  
Edit  
Format  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
To cancel the disc protect:  
• When you insert a disc pro-  
tected with this unit,Disc  
Protect ON OFF” will  
appear instead of “OFF →  
ON”.  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect ON  
Yes  
OFF  
No  
To release the protect for the  
disc, select “Disc Protect ON  
OFF” at step 3, then select  
Yes”.  
45  
Playing discs  
Information on DVD play  
Before you attempt to play DVD discs, read the following information.  
Playable discs  
Region codes  
This unit is compatible to play the following discs.  
To play a DVD, make sure that it meets the require-  
ments for Region Codes and Color Systems as  
described below. Discs that have the following logos  
will play on the unit. Other Disc types are not guar-  
anteed to play.  
This unit has been designed to play DVD discs with  
Region One (1). DVDs must be labeled for ALL  
regions or for Region 1 in order to play on this unit.  
You cannot play DVDs that are labeled for other  
regions. Look for the symbols below on your DVDs.  
If these region symbols do not appear on your  
DVD, you cannot play that DVD in this unit.  
Disc  
Logo  
DVDVIDEO  
The number inside the globe refers to region of the  
world. Region 1 represents the United States,  
Canada, Bermuda, the U.S.Virgin Islands and small  
regions near Australia.  
DVD-RW (VIDEO/VR mode)  
DVD-R (VIDEO mode)  
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only play on  
the unit with the same region code.  
CD-DA (AUDIO CD)  
Hint for DVD playback  
The contents of DVD disc are generally divided into  
titles.Titles may be further subdivided into chapters.  
CD-R (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 files)  
CD-RW (CD-DA FORMAT, MP3 files)  
Color systems  
Start Rec.  
Stop/Start  
Stop Rec.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
DVDs are recorded in different color systems  
throughout the world.The most common color sys-  
tems are NTSC (which is used primarily in the  
United States and Canada), PAL and SECAM.  
This unit uses NTSC, so DVDs you play must be  
recorded in the NTSC system.You cannot play  
DVDs recorded in other color systems.  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Guide to displays  
1. Indicates a disc type and a  
format mode.  
2. Indicates a recording speed  
5. Each icon means:  
DVD  
First:  
: Search  
: Audio  
Press DISPLAY button to call up  
the display menu.This menu will  
give you the information on the  
playing disc. Some operations are  
available while disc is playing.  
and possible recording time  
left.  
3. Indicates a current channel  
number and an audio status of  
the program.  
4. Indicates a title number, chap-  
ter number and the time  
elapsed of disc play.  
: Subtitle  
: Angle (exceptVR mode)  
: Repeat  
4
1
: Marker  
DVD-RW  
1
1
00:00:00  
Video mode  
: Noise Reduction  
: Zoom  
SP 1:25 Rem.  
CH 1  
2
3
5
: Spatializer  
46  
Playing discs  
Basic playback  
Playback  
VR mode:  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Original  
1
2
6
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
1
2  
3
SEARCH  
MODE  
1
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Press POWER button, then  
press DVD button.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
When you are playing a DVD, turn  
the TV on and be sure to select  
the input to which the unit is con-  
nected.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
MENU/LIST  
4
5
4
1
MENU / LIST button  
Playlist  
1
2  
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
2
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
Press OPEN/CLOSE A but-  
ton to open the disc tray.  
The disc tray will open.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
6
PAUSE  
3
Place the disc onto the disc  
tray with its label facing up  
and make sure to align the  
disc to the disc tray guide.  
5
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Playback will start.  
6
disc  
tray  
guide  
Press STOP C button to stop  
playback.  
Note  
• For DVD-R (Video mode)  
To eject the disc, press  
and DVD-RW (Video mode)  
discs which are already final-  
ized, a title list will be dis-  
played instead of thumbnails.  
This operation may take a  
while to be recognized.  
OPEN/CLOSE A button to open  
the disc tray, then remove the disc  
before turning off the unit.  
4
PressTOP MENU button to  
display the title menu.  
You can change “Original” or  
“Playlist” of VR mode using  
MENU / LIST button.  
Title Menu  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
JAN/1 12:24AM CH96 XP  
Video mode:  
Title List  
1
12  
3
You can resume play from  
where you stopped playing  
the disc. (Resume play)  
Refer to page 51 for details  
about resume play.  
JAN/1 12:00AM  
4
JAN/1 1:00AM  
5
JAN/1 2:00AM  
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
• Some discs may start playing  
automatically.  
47  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
DVD-V  
CD  
MP3  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
4
1
2
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Press PLAY B button to start  
playing.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
Press POWER button, then  
press DVD button.  
Playback will start.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
When you are playing a DVD or  
an audio CD, turn the TV on and  
be sure to select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
If you are playing a DVD-Video  
disc, a menu may appear.  
Refer to pages 49-50 for details  
about a disc menu.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
2
5
Press OPEN/CLOSE A but-  
ton to open the disc tray.  
The disc tray will open.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Press STOP C button to stop  
playing.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
1
4
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
3
STOP  
PLAY  
Place the disc onto the disc  
tray with its label facing up  
and make sure to align the  
disc to the disc tray guide.  
REW  
FWD  
5
PAUSE  
Note  
• Some discs may start playing  
automatically.  
For MP3 playback  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
• When selecting a folder, press  
PLAY B, ENTER or B button  
to go to the lower hierarchy.  
• Press s button or RETURN  
button to go to the previous  
hierarchy.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
In stop mode, pressTOP MENU  
button to call up the MP3 menu.  
1
2
2
List of MP3 Files  
DISC NAME  
• Press STOP C button to return  
to the first item.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
FOLDER NAME 1  
FOLDER NAME 2  
FOLDER NAME 3  
FOLDER NAME 4  
FOLDER NAME 5  
FOLDER NAME 6  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Hints for MP3 files:  
• Folders are known as Groups,  
files are known as Tracks.  
1
2
FILE NAME 1  
FILE NAME 2  
STOP  
PLAY  
1/2  
Folders are accompanied by  
MP3 files are accompanied by  
Reproduction will start from the  
selected track and go to the  
next one in turn.  
icon.  
icon.  
REW  
FWD  
2
PAUSE  
To exit the menu, press TOP  
MENU button again.  
The system can recognize up to 255  
groups (or folders) and up to 255 tracks.  
The name of the group and track  
can be displayed in up to 32 char-  
acters. Unrecognizable characters  
will be replaced with asterisks.  
2
K
L
Press  
/
buttons to select a  
Note  
desired folder (group) or track,  
then press ENTER button.  
• The audio source of MP3 files  
cannot be recorded as digital  
sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
• Files whole extension other  
than “.mp3 (MP3)” will not be  
listed in the MP3 menu.  
• Some unplayable folders or  
tracks may be listed in the  
MP3 menu due to the  
When selecting track:  
Playback will start.  
• If there are no files in the folder,  
“No Files” will be displayed.  
When selecting the folder:  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Press K or L button to select the  
track you want, then press ENTER  
button.  
This unit recommends the files  
recorded under the following cir-  
cumstances:  
Sampling frequency: 44.1kHz or 48kHz.  
Constant bit rate: 112kbps - 320kbps.  
recording status.  
48  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing discs using the disc menu  
DVD-V  
2
A DVD disc contains a disc menu  
that describes the contents or  
allows you to customize the play-  
back. For example, the menu may  
offer choices for subtitle lan-  
guages, special features, or chapter  
selection.  
Sometimes these are displayed  
automatically when you start play-  
back, otherwise only appear when  
you press MENU/LIST button.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select an item using K / L /  
{ / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button to confirm.  
Continue this step to set up all  
the features you want or to start  
playing the disc from the menu.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
2
2
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
MENU/LIST button:  
1
2
3
Displays a DVD disc menu which  
varies with the disc and may be  
the same as the ‘Title menu.’  
DVD  
First:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
K / L / { / B buttons:  
Moves the cursor around screen.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
1
Press MENU/LIST button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
The DVD main menu will appear.  
Enter button:  
REW  
FWD  
Selects the currently highlighted  
menu option.  
PAUSE  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
Number buttons:  
Selects a numbered menu option  
(some discs only). Press ENTER  
button after.  
3
Press MENU/LIST button to  
exit the menu.  
Note  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
49  
Playing discs  
Basic playback (cont’d)  
Playing discs using the title menu  
DVD-V  
2
Some DVDs have a title menu,  
which lists the titles available on  
them. It helps you to start play-  
back at a specific title.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a title to play using the  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Playback will begin at the title you  
selected.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
2
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
TOP MENU button:  
Displays the ‘Title menu’ of a  
DVD disc which varies with the  
disc.  
MENU/LIST  
PressTOP MENU button.  
1
2
3
The title menu will appear.  
2
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
If the feature is not available,  
may appear on the TV screen.  
K / L / { / B buttons:  
Moves the cursor around screen.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Enter button:  
Selects the current highlighted  
menu option.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Number buttons:  
Selects a numbered menu option  
(some discs only). Press ENTER  
button after.  
3
PressTOP MENU button to  
exit the title menu.  
Note  
• The TOP MENU button will  
not always be active with all  
DVDs.  
• Menus vary among discs.  
Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for  
details.  
50  
Playing discs  
Special playback  
Resume play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
2
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
CD  
MP3  
DVD-RW  
Press PLAY B button.  
In a few seconds, playback will  
resume from the point at which it  
stopped last.You can resume play  
at the same point even if you turn  
off the unit.  
MENU/LIST  
You can resume play from where  
you stopped playing the disc last.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
During playback, press STOP  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
C button.  
To cancel the resume play and  
start playing the disc from the  
beginning, press STOP C button  
the second time while the play-  
back is stopped.  
The resume message will appear.  
Screen:  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
1
2
2
PAUSE  
Note  
Resume ON  
• For MP3 files, playback will  
resume from the beginning of  
the track at which playback  
was stopped.  
Fast forward / Fast reverse  
Video  
VR  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
CD  
MP3  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
1
During playback, press D or E button.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
Every time you press D or E button, approximate speed will be  
changed as follows. (For DVD discs, the sound will be output during  
playback in fast forward of x2 only if you set “Fast Forward with Audio”  
to “ON” for the “Playback” setting in the SETUP menu.)  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
1
1
REW  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Normal  
speed  
1
REW  
REW  
REW  
REW  
REW  
REW  
x40  
x20  
x5  
x2  
x20  
x40  
playback  
Note  
For Audio CDs, approximate speed is fixed at x8 with sound.  
For MP3 files, approximate speed is fixed at x16.  
To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B button.  
• Forward/reverse speed will be  
indicated with icons as fol-  
lows.  
Forward (Approx. Speed)  
x2:  
x20:  
x40:  
Reverse (Approx. Speed)  
x5:  
x20:  
x40:  
51  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
SkippingTV commercials during play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
e.g. Press CM SKIP button once  
DVD-R  
You can skip TV commercials by  
pressing CM SKIP button, so that  
you can enjoy the recorded pro-  
grams without interrupting.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
CM Skip  
30 sec.  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
During playback, press CM  
SKIP button.  
MENU/LIST  
(forwarding 30 seconds.)  
Normal playback will start at 30  
seconds ahead from the point you  
press CM SKIP button.  
Every time you press CM SKIP  
button, the searching point will be  
extended by 30 seconds ahead.  
You can press up to 6 times (180  
seconds).  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
B
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Playback will restart automatically.  
Pause  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
CD  
2
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
MP3  
DVD-RW  
Press PLAY B button to  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
resume play.  
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
During playback, press  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
2
PAUSE  
1
52  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Step by step playback  
Video  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
2
SEARCH  
MODE  
DVD-RW  
Press SKIP G button  
repeatedly.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
The playback will advance one  
frame (or step) at a time when  
you press the skip button with  
the sound muted.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
During playback, press  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
MENU/LIST  
To play step by step back-  
ward:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Press SKIP H button repeatedly.  
Every time you press the button,  
the playback will go backward by  
one frame.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
1
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
3
PAUSE  
3
Press PLAY B button to  
resume play.  
Slow forward / Slow reverse play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
VR  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
1
During playback, press PAUSE k button, then press D or  
E
button.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
Every time you press D or E button, approximate speed will be  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
changed as follows. (The sound will remain mute.)  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
REW  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
REW  
REW  
Pause  
REW  
REW  
x1/4  
x1/8  
x1/16  
x1/16  
x1/8  
x1/2  
1
1
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
1
1
To return to the normal playback, press PLAY B button.  
Note  
• Forward/reverse speed will be  
indicated with icons as fol-  
lows.  
Forward (Approx. Speed)  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/2:  
Reverse (Approx. Speed)  
x1/16:  
x1/8:  
x1/4:  
53  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Zoom  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
DVD-R  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
2
VR  
DVD-RW  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Select a desired zoom factor  
to zoom using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The zoom area will be displayed.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
1
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
During playback, press  
ZOOM button.  
Zoom menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
x1.2  
x1.5  
x2.0  
Note  
• When selecting a smaller factor  
than the current one, the zoom  
area will not be displayed.  
To remove the zoom menu, press  
ZOOM button again at step 1.  
To cancel the zoom function,  
select x1.0 using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
3
B
Select a desired zoom position  
There are four options  
using K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
The zoom play will start.  
(x1.0,x1.2,x1.5 and x2.0), these  
are displayed excluding the cur-  
rent zoom rate.  
Spatializer setting (Virtual surround)  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
DVD-Video  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
1
1
01:23:45  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
DVD-RW  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
3
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Select a desired option using  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
K /  
L
buttons, then press  
REC  
SPEED  
ENTER button.  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Your setting will be activated.  
ON: Outputs the virtual surround  
sound.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
OFF: Outputs the original sound.  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Virtual surround menu will  
appear.  
Note  
• This feature is not available for  
some discs.  
• Select “OFF” at step 3 if the  
sound is distorted.  
54  
Playing discs  
Special playback (cont’d)  
Marker Setup  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
3
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
CD  
DVD-RW  
Select a desired marker num-  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
This feature allows you to assign  
a specific point on a disc to be  
called back later.  
ber using { / B buttons.  
When it reaches the desired  
point, press ENTER button.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
4
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
MENU/LIST  
1
To return to the marker later,  
select the desired marker  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
number using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
2
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Marker setup menu will appear.  
Screen for DVD:  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Screen for CD:  
Note  
Audio CD  
To clear a marker, select the  
1
01:23:45  
marker number to be cleared,  
then press CLEAR/C.RESET  
button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
• All markers will be erased  
when you operate these opera-  
tions listed below.  
– Opening the disc tray.  
Turning off the power.  
– Recording to a recordable  
disc.  
Changing the mode between  
Original and Playlist. (VR mode)  
You can mark up to 6 points.  
55  
Playing discs  
Search  
Title/Chapter search  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
DVD-RW  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Using SKIP H / G buttons  
Using DISPLAY button  
SEARCH  
MODE  
1
1
2
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
During playback, press SKIP  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
G button to skip the cur-  
rent title or chapter and  
move to the next.  
The title or chapter will move  
forward one at a time.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
1
2
MENU/LIST  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
To go back to the previous title  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
or chapter, press SKIP H but-  
ton.The title or chapter will move  
backward one title at a time.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
1
Select  
icon using { /  
B
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
PAUSE  
‘T’ for title will be highlighted.  
Title:  
Enter a desired title number  
to search using K / L buttons  
or number buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Title search will start.  
Chapter:  
To move to ‘C’ for chapter, press  
B button.  
Enter a desired chapter num-  
ber to search using K / L but-  
tons or number buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Chapter search will start.  
56  
Playing discs  
Search (cont’d)  
Track search  
CD  
MP3  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Using SKIP H / G buttons  
Using DISPLAY button  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
1
1
SEARCH  
MODE  
During playback, press SKIP  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
G button to skip the cur-  
rent track and move to the  
next.  
The track will move forward one  
at a time.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
Audio CD  
1
01:23:45  
2
3
To go back to the previous track,  
press SKIP H button.The track  
will move backward one at a time.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
2
Select  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
‘T’ for track will be highlighted.  
1
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
3
Enter a desired track number  
to search using K / L buttons  
or number buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Track search will start.  
Time search  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Video  
DVD-RW  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
CD  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
2
Select  
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
DVD-RW  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
icon using { /  
B
1
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
‘T’ for title or track will be high-  
lighted.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen for DVD:  
To move to the clock icon, press  
B button.  
2
3
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
3
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
REC/OTR  
Enter a desired time to  
Screen for CD:  
search using K / L buttons or  
number buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Note  
Audio CD  
1
01:23:45  
• Time search function is avail-  
able only in the same track or  
title.  
Time search will start.  
57  
Playing discs  
Repeat/Random/Program play  
Repeat play  
Video  
DVD-RW  
Title:  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
CD  
The current title will be played  
repeatedly. (DVD only)  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
MP3  
DVD-RW  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Chapter:  
1
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
The current chapter will be played  
repeatedly. (DVD only)  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
The display menu will appear.  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
All:  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
The current disc will be played  
repeatedly. CD, MP3 and DVD-  
RW (VR mode only)  
2
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
A-B:  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
The A-B point will be played  
repeatedly.  
2
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select  
icon using  
{
/
B
but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
When pressing ENTER button  
while A-B is highlighted, the start-  
ing point (A) will be decided.  
Repeat menu will appear.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
Screen:  
PAUSE  
Press ENTER button again to  
select the ending point (B).  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
OFF  
Title  
Chapter  
A-B  
Note  
Track:  
• The A-B Repeat playback can  
only be set within the current  
title (for DVDs), or current  
track (for Audio CDs).  
To cancel the repeat playback,  
select OFF at step 2.  
You cannot select “Group”  
during the random playback  
of MP3 files.  
The current track will be played  
repeatedly. (CD, MP3 only)  
Group:  
3
The current group will be played  
repeatedly. (MP3 only)  
Select a desired option to  
repeat using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
The selected repeat play will start.  
Random play  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CD  
MP3  
CLEAR/  
REC  
With this function, you can play a  
disc randomly instead of playing it  
in the original order.  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
2
C.RESET MONITOR  
Select “CD” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
MENU/LIST  
DVD  
First:  
CD Playback Mode menu will  
appear.  
2
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/CD menu.  
SETUP/CD menu will appear.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
CD Playback Mode  
REC  
SPEED  
Random Play  
Program Play  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Screen:  
3
Note  
Select “Random Play” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
To cancel random playback,  
press STOP C button twice  
during random playback.  
Random playback will start.  
Setup Menu  
58  
Playing discs  
Repeat/Random/Program play (cont’d)  
Program play  
CD  
3
You can program the disc to play  
in your desired order.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Program Play” using  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
DVD  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Program play list will appear.  
First:  
SEARCH  
MODE  
4
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CD Playback Mode > Program Play  
Press SETUP button to dis-  
play SETUP/CD menu.  
SETUP/CD menu will appear.  
Screen:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
2
3
4
Total  
00:00:00  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
5
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select a desired track using  
L buttons, then press  
K
Setup Menu  
REW  
FWD  
/
PAUSE  
ENTER button or B button.  
A cursor will move to the next.  
2
CD Playback Mode > Program Play  
Select “CD” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
07 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
CD Playback Mode menu will  
appear.  
Total  
00:04:30  
CD Playback Mode  
Random Play  
Program Play  
5
Press PLAY B button to start  
program playback.  
Program playback will start.  
Note  
To erase tracks you selected,  
press CLEAR/C.RESET but-  
ton.  
You can make program set-  
tings up to 50.  
To cancel program playback,  
press STOP C button twice  
during program playback.  
You may also select a desired  
track using Number buttons  
at step 4.  
59  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video  
You can select an audio or video format as you prefer depending on  
the contents of the disc you are playing.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
Switching audio soundtrack  
VR  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
<DVD-RWVR mode>  
SEARCH  
MODE  
When playing a DVD-Video disc  
recorded with two or more  
soundtracks (these are often in  
different languages), you can  
switch between them anytime  
during playback.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD-RW  
VR Original  
1
1
00:00:00  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1 Dolby Digital Dual L/R  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch ----  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
On DVD-RW discs recorded in  
VR mode, you can switch to main  
(L), sub audio (R) or a mix of  
both (L/R).  
2
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
3
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select a desired audio sound-  
1
track using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
<DVD-Video>  
STOP  
PLAY  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Audio soundtrack will switch.  
<DVD-RWVR mode>  
Audio channel menu will appear.  
Follow the step 4.  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
DVD-RW  
VR Original  
1
1
00:00:00  
1 Dolby Digital Dual  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch  
L/R  
L
R
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Audio menu will appear.  
<DVD-Video>  
Note  
4
Some discs will only allow  
you to change the sound-  
track from the disc’s menu.  
Press TOP MENU button or  
MENU / LIST button to dis-  
play the disc’s menu.  
On DVD-RW discs recorded  
inVR mode that may have  
both a main and a sub audio  
channel, you can switch to  
main (L), sub audio (R) or a  
mix of both (L/R).  
This unit CANNOT record  
in both stereo and SAP  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
at the same time.  
Select a desired audio chan-  
nel using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Audio channel will switch.  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
1 Dolby Digital 5.1ch English  
2 Dolby Digital 2ch Japanese  
60  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
CD  
MP3  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
2
When playing Audio CDs or MP3  
files you can switch between  
stereo, just the left channel or  
just the right channel.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Audio menu will appear.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
1
MENU/LIST  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
3
Select a desired audio chan-  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
nel using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Audio channel will switch.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Audio CD  
1
00:00:00  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Audio CD  
1
00:00:00  
L/R  
L
STOP  
PLAY  
R
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Switching subtitles  
VR  
DVD-V  
DVD-RW  
2
Many DVDVideo discs have subti-  
tles in one or more languages.  
The case usually tells you which  
subtitle languages are available.  
You can switch subtitle languages  
anytime during playback.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Subtitle menu will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
1
OFF  
MENU/LIST  
1English  
2Japanese  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
3
Select a desired subtitle lan-  
guage using K / L buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
Subtitle will be displayed in the  
selected language.  
Note  
• Some discs will only allow  
you to change the subtitle  
from the disc’s menu. Press  
TOP MENU button or MENU  
/ LIST button to display the  
disc’s menu.  
When selecting “OFF,” subtitle will  
disappear.  
61  
Playing discs  
Selecting the format of audio and video (cont’d)  
Switching camera angles  
DVD-V  
2
Some DVDVideo discs feature  
scenes shot from two or more  
angles, check the case for details:  
it should be marked with an angle  
icon if it contains multi-angle  
scenes.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select  
icon using { /  
B
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Angle will switch each time you  
press ENTER button.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
1
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
2
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Angle icon appears when a switch-  
ing camera angle is available.  
Reducing block noise  
Video  
OPEN/  
POWER  
DVD-V  
VR  
DVD-R  
CLOSE  
DVD-RW  
DVD-Video  
1
1
00:00:00  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
DVD-RW  
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
During playback, press DIS-  
PLAY button.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
The display menu will appear.  
Screen:  
2
3
3
DVD-Video  
1
1
01:23:45  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Select a desired option using  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Your setting will be activated.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
This function reduces noise in the  
playback picture.When playing  
back discs recorded in long time  
mode such as SLP or SEP mode,  
select "Type 1" or "Type 2".  
("Type 2" is more effective.)  
When playing back discs with a  
few noises such as DVD-Video  
discs, select "OFF".  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
2
Select  
icon using { /  
B
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
NR menu will appear.  
62  
Editing  
Information on disc editing  
Guide to a title list  
Editing discs inVideo mode  
Title list allows you to check the titles recorded on  
the disc easily.You can choose a title to edit from this  
screen and easily edit the titles as you prefer.  
You can edit discs inVideo mode for the following items.  
Be sure that once you edit titles, they will not remain as  
recorded originally.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 65)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 66-67)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to page 68)  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
6
Note  
Once a disc is finalized, editing the disc or  
recording to the disc will not be available.  
(Except DVD-RW discs inVR mode.)  
A playlist is not available with the DVD-R discs  
and DVD-RW discs inVideo mode.  
JAN/1 6:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
3
1
2
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
Scene Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
JAN/1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
8
6
5
4
7
1. Titles recorded on the disc can be selected to  
edit by pressing ENTER button with the cursor  
on the title.  
2. Protect icon, which appears when the title has  
been protected.  
3. The arrow icon, which means the title list  
includes a next or a previous page. Press B or  
{ button by following direction of the icon.  
4. The menus in here for editing titles as you pre-  
fer. The available menus depends on the disc  
type and the format type.  
5. The details of the title, which can be changed to  
the title name you will edit.  
6. Time status bar of the title.  
7. The selected title thumbnails from the title list.  
8. Playback status of the current disc.  
63  
Editing  
Information on disc editing (cont’d)  
Editing discs inVR mode  
For discs inVR mode, you can edit from “Original” menu or “Playlist” menu, which is created from the  
original.  
Editing original titles  
The following items can be used to edit the original  
titles.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 69)  
• Deleting parts of titles (Refer to pages 70-71)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 71-72)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to  
pages 73-74)  
Editing playlists  
You can create a playlist from original titles, so that  
you can edit as you prefer without losing original  
titles.  
The following items you can edit with a playlist.  
• Deleting titles (Refer to page 78)  
• Deleting parts of titles (Refer to pages 79-80)  
• Putting names on titles (Refer to pages 80-81)  
• Setting or clearing chapter markers (Refer to  
pages 82-83)  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (Refer to pages  
74-75)  
• Setting titles to protect (Refer to page 76)  
• Releasing titles from protecting (Refer to page 77)  
• Setting pictures for thumbnails (Refer to pages  
83-84)  
• Adding titles to a playlist (Refer to page 85)  
• Deleting a playlist (Refer to page 86)  
Note  
Original titles once edited will not remain as recorded originally.When you want to leave the original as  
it is, edit the playlist as you prefer. (Refer to pages 78-86)  
64  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode  
Deleting titles  
Video  
DVD-RW  
3
You can delete titles which you  
do not need anymore.  
Be sure to know that the titles  
once deleted cannot be brought  
back to the disc.  
When the last title in the title list  
inVideo mode is deleted, the disc  
space to record will be increased.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Edit menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
MENU/LIST  
DVD  
First:  
1
2
3
4
5
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
1
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
Press SETUP button. Select  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Title Delete” using  
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
K
REW  
FWD  
Disc  
/
PAUSE  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
2
0:01:25  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
5
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Disc > Edit  
1
12  
3
Title will be deleted.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
6
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
65  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
Putting names on titles  
Video  
DVD-RW  
4
You can put title names on the  
titles and change the names from  
this menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
5
1
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
First:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
MENU/LIST  
A B C  
1
1
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
3
4
5
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Finalize  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
1
2
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Titlelist will appear.  
/
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
Screen:  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Disc > Edit  
Press  
area for entering title names  
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
1
12  
3
! ” # $ %  
& ’ ( ) *  
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
(*1)  
(*1)  
1
(*2)  
(*2)  
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
3
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
wxyz  
*1 Press  
*2 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
!?  
to  
buttons, character set will  
be changed to the previous input mode  
Edit menu will appear.  
automatically.  
To delete letters, press CLEAR button repeatedly.  
Holding CLEAR button to delete all letters.  
To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
press  
button.  
You can enter up to 30 letters.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
66  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
6
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
MENU/LIST  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
6
Yes  
No  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
abc  
Writing to Disc  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
7
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
67  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVideo mode (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
Video  
DVD-RW  
You can put chapter markers in  
each title. Once a chapter is  
marked, you can use it for the  
chapter search feature.  
You can set chapter markers at a  
specified time you selected for  
titles with more than 5 minutes.  
OPEN/  
Disc > Edit  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Title Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
0:01:25  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
DVD  
First:  
MENU/LIST  
4
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
Press SETUP button. Select  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc > Edit  
STOP  
PLAY  
Title D
OFF  
Disc  
1
Edit Ti
5 minutes  
REW  
FWD  
Chapt
Edit  
10 minutes  
PAUSE  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Format  
Finalize  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
5
2
Select a desired time using  
K
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
/
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit  
Title D
OFF  
5 minutes  
Chapt
10 minutes  
1
Edit Ti
Disc > Edit  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
1
12  
3
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
0:01:25  
Note  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
You cannot select a time for  
putting markers beyond a  
length of a title.  
• When recording at the  
recording speed other than  
XP or SEP, the length of chap-  
ters may be slightly longer or  
shorter than the one speci-  
fied at the step 5.  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
3
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Chapter markers will be added at  
the specified time.  
Edit menu will appear.  
• A chapter marker may be  
delayed according to the  
recording content.  
7
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
68  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original)  
Deleting titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
When a title is deleted from an  
original list inVR mode, the disc  
space to record will be increased.  
Be advised that the titles once  
deleted cannot be brought back  
to the disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD  
Disc > Edit > Original  
CLEAR/  
REC  
First:  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
MENU/LIST  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press SETUP button. Select  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
Disc  
Edit  
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Title Delete” using  
L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
K
Format  
REW  
FWD  
/
Finalize  
PAUSE  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect OFF ON  
2
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Title will be deleted.  
Original  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture  
Protect OFF ON  
3
Yes  
No  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Original list will appear.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
12  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
7
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
69  
.
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Deleting parts of titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You can delete part of a title, the  
disc space to record will be  
increased.  
Be advised that the parts once  
deleted cannot be brought back  
to the disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD  
Disc > Edit > Original  
CLEAR/  
REC  
First:  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
MENU/LIST  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press SETUP button. Select  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
Disc  
Edit  
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Scene Delete” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Format  
REW  
FWD  
Finalize  
PAUSE  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene D
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
Chapter
Preview  
Index P
2
Delete  
Protect
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:00:55  
Disc > Edit  
6
Press ENTER button to  
decide a start point, then  
press ENTER button to  
decide an end point.  
A cursor will move to “Preview.”  
You can check a preview.  
Original  
3
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
<Preview>  
Start point End point  
Original list will appear.  
Before  
editing  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
12  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Edited  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
70  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
7
8
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Delete” using K /  
L
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Part of a title will be deleted.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Disc > Edit > Original  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
Scene Delete  
Title Delete  
Scene Delete  
1
1
MENU/LIST  
Start  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
Edit Titl
End  
Chapter
Chapter
Preview  
Delete  
Preview  
Delete  
Index P
Protect
Index P
Protect
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Yes  
No  
7
8
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
9
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
REC/OTR  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Note  
You cannot select “Scene  
9
Delete” when the number of  
chapter markers in the original  
or playlist is more than 900.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Putting names on titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
2
You can put title names on the  
titles and change the names from  
this menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
First:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc > Edit  
MENU/LIST  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Original  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
STOP  
PLAY  
Finalize  
REW  
FWD  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
PAUSE  
71  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
3
6
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
6
8
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original list will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
1
12  
3
MENU/LIST  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
3
4
5
6
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
STOP  
PLAY  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
7
Original menu will appear.  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
/
buttons, then press  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
ENTER button.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
0:01:25  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Yes  
No  
Press  
abc  
5
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
Writing to Disc  
! ” # $ %  
& ’ ( ) *  
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
(*1)  
(*1)  
1
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
(*2)  
(*2)  
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
8
Disc > Edit > Original > Edit Title Name  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
A B C  
1
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
wxyz  
*1 Press  
*2 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
!?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
to  
buttons, character set will  
be changed to the previous input mode  
automatically.  
To delete letters, press CLEAR button repeatedly.  
Holding CLEAR button to delete all letters.  
To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
press  
button.  
You can enter up to 30 letters.  
72  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
VR  
DVD-RW  
You can put chapter markers in  
OPEN/  
Disc > Edit > Original  
POWER  
CLOSE  
each title. Once a chapter is  
marked, you can use it for the  
chapter search feature.  
You can put a chapter marker  
anywhere you want.  
1
2  
3
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
When the number of chapter  
markers in the original list comes  
to 999 in total, you cannot add  
any more chapter markers.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
4
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD  
First:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Original menu will appear.  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Press SETUP button. Select  
Disc > Edit > Original  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Disc  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Edit  
0:01:25  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
5
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter
Chapter 1/1  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Disc > Edit  
0:01:25  
6
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
<Add>:  
Original  
3
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter
Chapter 1/1  
Original list will appear.  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
73  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
<Delete>:  
<Delete>:  
The chapter marker which you  
selected will be deleted.  
OPEN/  
Disc > Edit > Original  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Add  
Chapter
Chapter 2/2  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Delete  
Index P
Disc > Edit > Original  
Protect OFF ON  
F
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Yes  
No  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Add  
Chapter
Chapter 2/2  
0:01:25  
Delete  
Index P
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
Protect OFF ON  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Yes  
No  
You cannot delete the first  
chapter marker of each title.  
MENU/LIST  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
7
7
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
<Add>:  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
8
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
A chapter marker will be added.  
8
STOP  
PLAY  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
REW  
FWD  
Title Delete  
1
PAUSE  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter
Chapter 1/1  
Delete  
Index P
Protect OFF ON  
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
VR  
DVD-RW  
OPEN/  
2
POWER  
CLOSE  
You can set a picture to each title for  
a thumbnail. It helps you to remem-  
ber the contents of the title you are  
playing.The beginning picture has  
been selected as the default.  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
DVD  
First:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc > Edit  
MENU/LIST  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Original  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
REC/OTR  
Disc  
Edit  
Format  
Note  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
• If a selected picture for a  
thumbnail is deleted by delet-  
ing a part of a title, a default  
picture will be selected.  
74  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
OPEN/  
3
6
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original list will appear.  
A picture for thumbnail will be  
set.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Disc > Edit > Original  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
12  
3
Disc > Edit > Original  
MENU/LIST  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
3
4
5
6
Yes  
No  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
7
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
STOP  
PLAY  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
7
Original menu will appear.  
5
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
5
Select “Index Picture Set”  
using K / L buttons. Use SKIP  
H / G, REW E, FWD D,  
PLAY B and PAUSE F but-  
tons to decide the picture  
you want to select as a  
thumbnail.Then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
75  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Setting titles to protect  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
To prevent accidental editing or  
erasing the titles, you can protect  
them from the original menu.  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
DVD  
First:  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Disc > Edit > Original  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
1
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
MENU/LIST  
Press SETUP button. Select  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
Disc  
1
7
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Edit  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Format  
5
Finalize  
Select “Protect OFF ON”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
2
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect OFF ON  
Original  
Yes  
No  
3
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Original list will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
7
1
2  
3
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
To protect a whole disc  
(DVD-RWVR mode Only):  
Select “Disc Protect” from Disc  
menu, then select “Yes”.  
76  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Original) (cont’d)  
Releasing titles from protecting  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You are allowed to release the  
titles protecting feature once pro-  
tected.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
DVD  
First:  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Original menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
1
Disc Edit > Original  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
2
Press SETUP button. Select  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
MENU/LIST  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
Disc  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
7
Edit  
“Protect ON OFF” is selected.  
REC  
SPEED  
Format  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
Press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
PAUSE  
Disc Edit > Original  
2
Title Delete  
2
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
B
Yes  
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original  
Disc Edit > Original  
Title Delete  
2
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
Protect ON OFF  
3
Yes  
No  
Select “Original” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
JAN/ 1 2:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Original list will appear.  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Disc > Edit > Original  
1
12  
3
7
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
77  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist)  
Deleting titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
InVR mode, even when a title is  
deleted from a Playlist, the original  
title will remain in an Original list.  
The disc space to record will not  
be increased.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Playlist menu will appear.  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
First:  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
MENU/LIST  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
3
4
5
6
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc  
5
/
Edit  
Format  
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
STOP  
PLAY  
Finalize  
L buttons, then press  
REW  
FWD  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
PAUSE  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
2
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:01:25  
Disc > Edit  
6
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Title will be deleted.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Original  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
3
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
12  
3
7
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
78  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Deleting parts of titles  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
OPEN/  
You can delete a specific part of a  
title.  
Even when a title is deleted from  
the playlist, the original title will  
remain.  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Playlist menu will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
The disc space to record will not  
be increased.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
DVD  
MENU/LIST  
First:  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Scene Delete” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Disc  
REW  
FWD  
Edit  
PAUSE  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
Chapter
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
2
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
0:00:55  
6
Disc > Edit  
Press ENTER button to  
decide a start point, then  
press ENTER button to  
decide an end point.  
A cursor will move to “Preview”.  
You can check a preview.  
Original  
3
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
<Preview>  
Start point End point  
Before  
editing  
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Edited  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
Instructions continue to the next page.  
79  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Part of a title will be deleted.  
OPEN/  
7
POWER  
CLOSE  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
Select “Delete” using K /  
L
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Scene De  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Chapter
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Yes  
No  
Option window will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
MENU/LIST  
Scene Delete  
Start  
Edit Titl
End  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Chapter
Preview  
Index P
Delete  
7
8
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
9
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
9
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Note  
8
You cannot select “Scene  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Delete” when the number of  
chapter markers in the original  
or playlist is more than 900.  
Putting names on titles  
VR  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
DVD-RW  
You can put names on the titles  
and change the names from this  
menu.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Disc > Edit  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
First:  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Original  
MENU/LIST  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
3
3
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc  
Playlist will appear.  
Edit  
Format  
STOP  
PLAY  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Finalize  
REW  
FWD  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
1
12  
3
PAUSE  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
80  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
OPEN/  
4
7
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select a desired title using K / Select Yes” using { / B but-  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Playlist menu will appear.  
The name you entered will be  
activated for the title.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Title Delete  
1
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
MENU/LIST  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
4
5
6
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Yes  
No  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
abc  
8
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Writing to Disc  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
REW  
FWD  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
PAUSE  
8
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP to exit  
DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
/
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
0:01:25  
below.  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
& ’ ( ) *  
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
6
(*1)  
(*1)  
1
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
(*2)  
(*2)  
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
GHI  
ghi  
JKL  
jkl  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
wxyz  
*1 Press  
*2 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
!?  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
to  
buttons, character set will  
be changed to the previous input mode  
0:01:25  
automatically.  
To delete letters, press CLEAR button repeatedly.  
Holding CLEAR button to delete all letters.  
To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
area for entering title names  
press  
button.  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
You can enter up to 30 letters.  
81  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Setting or clearing chapter markers  
VR  
DVD-RW  
You can put chapter markers in  
each title. Once a chapter is  
marked, you can use it for the  
chapter search feature.  
You can put a chapter marker  
anywhere you want.  
OPEN/  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
12  
3
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
When the number of chapter  
markers in the playlist comes to  
999 in total, you cannot add any  
more chapter markers.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
4
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVD  
First:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
Playlist menu will appear.  
1
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Press SETUP button. Select  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Disc  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Edit  
0:01:25  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
5
Select “Chapter Mark” using  
K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapter
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Delete  
Index P
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
6
Select “Add” or “Delete”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
<Add>:  
Disc Setting  
3
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapter
Playlist will appear.  
Delete  
Index P
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
82  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
<Delete>:  
The chapter marker which you  
selected will be deleted.  
<Delete>:  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
OPEN/  
POWER  
Title Delete  
CLOSE  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Add  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapter
Delete  
Index P
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
SEARCH  
MODE  
F
Yes  
No  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Add  
Chapter 2/2  
Chapter
0:01:25  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Delete  
Index P
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Yes  
No  
You cannot delete the first  
chapter of each title.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
MENU/LIST  
7
7
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
S
elect “Yes” using { / B but-  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
tons, then press ENTER button.  
A chapter marker will be added.  
<Add>:  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
8
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
8
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
STOP  
PLAY  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
REW  
FWD  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
PAUSE  
Add  
Chapter 1/1  
Chapter
Delete  
Index P
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Setting pictures for thumbnails  
VR  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
DVD-RW  
2
+
.@/:  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
You can set a picture to each title  
for a thumbnail. It helps you to  
remember the contents of the  
title you are playing.The begin-  
ning picture has been selected as  
the default.  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
GHI  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
DVD  
First:  
Disc > Edit  
1
2
1
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Press SETUP button. Select  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
REC/OTR  
Original  
Note  
Disc  
Edit  
• If a selected picture for a  
Format  
thumbnail is deleted by delet-  
ing a part of a title, a default  
picture will be selected.  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
83  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
3
6
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
A picture for thumbnail will be  
set.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Playlist will appear.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
12  
3
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
MENU/LIST  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
3
4
5
6
Yes  
No  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
7
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
4
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
STOP  
PLAY  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
7
Playlist menu will appear.  
5
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
5
Select “Index Picture Set”  
using K / L buttons. Use SKIP  
H / G, REW E, FWD D,  
PLAY B and PAUSE F but-  
tons to decide the picture  
you want to select as a  
thumbnail.Then press ENTER  
button.  
Option window will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Title Delete  
1
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Index Picture Set  
F
Yes  
No  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
84  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Adding titles to a Playlist  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
You can add or delete a title in  
the playlist as you prefer.  
You can add titles to a Playlist up  
to 99.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Add NewTitle” using  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Original list will appear.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
First:  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Add New Title  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
1
12  
3
MENU/LIST  
Press SETUP button. Select  
JAN/10 10:30AM  
JAN/12 5:00PM  
JAN/12 8:00PM  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
1
2
3
4
5
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
Disc  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Edit  
Format  
5
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
STOP  
PLAY  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Playlist > Add New Title  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
58%  
Writing to Disc  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Disc > Edit  
1
2  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
6
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
JAN/12 8:00PM  
Original  
6
3
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Playlist will appear.  
To delete a title from Playlist,  
refer to “Deleting titles” on page  
78.  
To delete a Playlist, refer to  
“Deleting a Playlist” on page 86.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
12  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
85  
Editing  
Editing DVD-RW discs inVR mode (Playlist) (cont’d)  
Deleting a Playlist  
VR  
DVD-RW  
4
A Playlist can be deleted if no  
longer needed.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “Delete Playlist” using  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
DVD  
K / L / { / B buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
First:  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
Press SETUP button. Select  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
12  
3
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
MENU/LIST  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
1
2
3
4
5
Delete  
Playlist  
Disc  
Yes  
No  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Edit  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Format  
1
Finalize  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc Protect OFF ON  
5
STOP  
PLAY  
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Playlist will be erased.  
After writing to disc is completed,  
the unit will be in stop mode.  
2
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Original/PlayList menu will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit  
Original  
3
Select “PlayList” using { /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
B
Playlist will appear.  
Disc > Edit > Playlist  
1
12  
3
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
Add New  
Title  
Delete  
Playlist  
Note  
• Deleting a Playlist will not  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
increase the available record-  
ing time on disc.  
86  
Editing  
Editing DVD-R discs  
Deleting titles  
DVD-R  
Disc > Edit  
You can delete titles which you  
do not need, however the disc  
space to record on the disc will  
not be changed.  
Be sure to know that the titles  
once deleted cannot be brought  
back to the disc.  
Title Delete  
1
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
0:01:25  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
You cannot select “Chapter Mark”.  
DVD  
First:  
MENU/LIST  
4
1
1
2
3
4
5
Select “Title Delete” using  
K
Press SETUP button. Select  
/
L buttons, then press  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
ENTER button.  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
1
6
Option window will appear.  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc > Edit  
STOP  
PLAY  
Title Delete  
1
Disc  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
REW  
FWD  
Edit  
PAUSE  
Format  
Finalize  
Yes  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
No  
0:01:25  
5
2
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Select “Edit” using K / L but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
Title will be deleted.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
Disc > Edit  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Disc > Edit  
1
12  
3
Yes  
No  
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
Writing to Disc  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
3
6
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
Edit menu will appear.  
87  
Editing  
Editing DVD-R discs (cont’d)  
Putting names on titles  
DVD-R  
4
You can put names on the titles  
and change the names from this  
menu.  
The names you put on the titles  
will be displayed on a titlelist.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
Select “EditTitle Name”  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
A window for entering a title  
name will appear.  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
5
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
First:  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
MENU/LIST  
1
Press SETUP button. Select  
1
2
3
4
5
6
“DISC” using { / B buttons,  
then press ENTER button.  
DISC menu will appear.  
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
0:01:25  
1
7
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Disc  
5
Edit  
To enter a title name, follow  
the steps of "Guide to edit  
title name" on this page.  
character set  
Format  
Finalize  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
1
2
[
]
Guide to edit title name  
Select “Edit” using K /  
L
but-  
[
[
]
Step1 : Select a desired character set using  
K
L
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
/
tons, then press ENTER button.  
Titlelist will appear.  
Screen:  
buttons, then press  
A B C  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
0:01:25  
ENTER button.  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering a title  
name, press ENTER button.  
]
Step2 : Press Number buttons following by the list  
below.  
Select  
Disc > Edit  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
1
2  
3
<space>  
<space>  
0
<space>  
! ” # $ %  
& ’ ( ) *  
+ , - . / : ;  
< = > ?  
@ [ ] ^  
_ { | }  
6
JAN/1 1:00AM  
4
JAN/1 2:00AM  
5
JAN/1 3:00AM  
(*1)  
(*1)  
1
Select “Yes” using { / B but-  
tons, then press ENTER but-  
ton.  
JAN/1 4:00AM  
JAN/1 5:00AM  
(*2)  
(*2)  
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
(*2)  
GHI  
ghi  
Disc > Edit > Edit Title Name  
JKL  
jkl  
3
A B C  
1
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
a b c  
1 2 3  
@ ! ?  
Select a desired title using K /  
L / { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
wxyz  
Yes  
No  
*1 Press  
*2 Press  
button, character set will be changed  
abc  
to the " @ " mode automatically.  
!?  
Edit menu will appear.  
Writing to Disc  
to  
buttons, character set will  
be changed to the previous input mode  
automatically.  
Disc > Edit  
To delete letters, press CLEAR button repeatedly.  
Holding CLEAR button to delete all letters.  
To go on to the next entering area for letters,  
This operation may take a  
while to be completed.  
Title Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
press  
button.  
You can enter up to 30 letters.  
7
JAN/ 1 1:00AM CH12 XP  
After writing to disc is com-  
pleted, press SETUP button  
to exit DISC menu.  
0:01:25  
You cannot select “Chapter Mark”.  
88  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Tour of the SETUP menu  
The following table is the contents which you can set and the default settings.  
Refer to the following table for useful operation.  
SETUP menu  
Items (highlight is the default)  
Contents  
1.Language setting  
Pages 90-91  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Disc Menu Language  
Set the language for disc menu.  
Original  
English  
French  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Set the language for audio.  
Set the language for subtitle.  
OFF  
English  
French  
100%  
OSD Background  
Transparency  
Set the background transparency of OSD  
screen.  
2.Display setting  
Pages 92-93  
35%  
25%  
OSD Background  
Color  
1
2
3
Set the OSD screen color.  
1 (Green), 2 (Blue), 3 (Red)  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Español  
Set the language for OSD  
(On Screen Display).  
Screen Saver  
OFF  
5 minutes  
10minutes  
Set the time to work the screen saver on  
the screen.  
PCM  
Digital Out  
3.Audio setting  
Pages 94-95  
Set whether the sound recorded in 96kHz  
will be down sampled in 48kHz.  
Auto  
48kHz  
96kHz  
Dolby Digital  
Set the type of sound signal which outputs  
from the digital audio output jack.  
PCM  
Stream  
DTS  
Set whether DTS signal will be output or  
not.  
ON  
OFF  
Compressing the range of sound volume.  
Dynamic Range  
Control  
ON  
OFF  
Outputting the sound during play in fast  
forward.  
Fast Forward with  
Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4.Parental setting  
Pages 96-97  
ALL  
level 8 to 1  
Set the parental level of your DVD discs.  
Parental Lock  
Enter the current  
four-digit password  
Set and change the password.  
(Change password)  
Note  
• If you change the setting in SETUP  
menu, the information of contents  
stays on even when the power is  
switched off.  
89  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Language  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
4
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
2
3
4
Setup Menu  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
5
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
2
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
SETUP menu will appear.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
Note  
ENTER button.  
• Only the languages supported  
by the disc can be selected.  
• Audio Language setting may  
not be available to some  
discs.  
You can change or switch off  
the subtitles on a DVD disc  
also from the disc menu if it  
is available.  
90  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Language (cont’d)  
Disc Menu Language (Default : English)  
Set the language for Disc Menu.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Audio Language (Default : Original)  
Set the Audio language.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Original  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Subtitle Language (Default : OFF)  
Set the subtitle language.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
French  
Other  
Spanish  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
If “Other” is selected, press 4-digit code using number buttons.  
All  
English  
When you finish entering  
the code, press ENTER  
button. Refer to the lan-  
guage code table on page  
105.  
age  
French  
Spanish  
e
Other  
Code Input  
- - - -  
Control  
Audio  
ON  
OFF  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
91  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Display  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
2
3
4
Setup Menu  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
5
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
2
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Display” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
English  
10 minutes  
Screen Saver  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
92  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Display (cont’d)  
OSD BackgroundTransparency (Default : 35%)  
Set the background transparency of OSD screen.  
You can choose one among 0% through 100%.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
100%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
85%  
70%  
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
50%  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
s  
35%  
25%  
10%  
0%  
OSD Background Color (Default : 1 Green)  
Set the OSD screen color.  
You can choose one among 1(Green), 2(Blue), and 3(Red).  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1  
2
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
3
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
10 minutes  
OSD Language (Default : English)  
Set the language for OSD.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
Setup > Display  
VCR DVD  
Setup > Display  
VCR DVD  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
1
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
English  
10 minutes  
Français  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
s  
Español  
Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)  
Set the time to work the screen saver function on the screen.  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
DVD  
Setup > Display  
DVD  
Setup > Display  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
OSD Background Transparency  
OSD Background Color  
OSD Language  
35%  
1
1
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
English  
10 minutes  
5 minutes  
Screen Saver  
Screen Saver  
10 minutes  
s  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
93  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Audio  
Choose the appropriate Audio settings for your equipment.  
It will only affect DVD discs during playback.  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
1
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
2
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Setup Menu  
1
5
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
2
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
STOP  
PLAY  
ENTER button.  
REW  
FWD  
SETUP menu will appear.  
PAUSE  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
Note  
• Dynamic Range Control func-  
tion is available only on the  
discs which are recorded in  
the Dolby Digital format.  
4
Select a desired item using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Digital Out  
Set the digital audio output.  
Select a setting using K /  
L
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Option window will appear.  
Proceed to steps A, B or C.  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
PCM  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
OFF  
94  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Audio (cont’d)  
Settings for PCM (Default :Auto)  
A
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
Original  
OFF  
Note  
When playing disc with copy-  
right protection  
Your setting will be activated.  
Auto  
: Select “Auto” usually.  
• If you select “Auto”, the sound  
will be down sampled at 48kHz.  
• If you select “96kHz”, no digital  
sound will be output. Select  
“Auto”, so that outputting  
48kHz digital sound.  
PCAuto  
48kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is NOT com-  
patible with 96kHz PCM, select “48kHz”.  
96kHz sound will be output in 48kHz.  
96kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is compatible  
with 96kHz PCM, select “96kHz”. 96kHz  
sound will be output.  
48kHz  
ntrol  
udio  
Dol
96kHz  
DTS  
Settings for Dolby Digital (Default : Stream)  
B
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then  
Note  
Original  
OFF  
press ENTER button.  
When playing a DVD-RW  
disc recorded inVR mode  
• If the audio source on a disc is  
Dolby Digital format, set “Dolby  
Digital” to “PCM” so that you  
can switch to main (L), sub  
Your setting will be activated.  
PCM : Convert the Dolby Digital into PCM  
(2 channel).  
PCM  
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT com-  
patible with Dolby Digital, set to “PCM”.  
Stream : Outputs Dolby Digital signals.  
When your amplifier/decoder is compati-  
ble with Dolby Digital, set to “Stream”.  
ntrol  
Do
PCM  
Stream  
DT
Audio  
audio (R), or a mix of both (L/R)  
with your amplifier/decoder.  
Settings for DTS (Default : OFF)  
C
Select a setting using K / L buttons, then press ENTER button.  
Original  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
ON  
OFF  
: Outputs DTS signals.  
When your amplifier/decoder is compatible with DTS, set to “ON”.  
: No DTS signal is output.  
PCM  
ntrol  
udio  
Dolby Digital  
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible with DTS, set to  
“OFF”.  
ON  
DTS  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control (Default : ON)  
Set to ON to compress the range between soft and loud sounds.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
ON  
O
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Fast Forward with Audio (Default : OFF)  
Set to ON to output the sound during playback in fast forward of x2.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Select a setting using K /  
buttons, then press ENTER  
button.  
L
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
O
OFF  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
95  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Parental lock level  
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. Playback  
will stop if the ratings exceed the levels you set, it will require  
you to enter a password before the disc will playback.This fea-  
ture prevents your children from viewing inappropriate materi-  
al.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Press STOP button if you are playing a disc.  
4
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
1
MENU/LIST  
Press SETUP button to display SETUP/DISC menu.  
SETUP/DISC menu will appear.  
2
3
4
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
1
5
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
Setup Menu  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
2
Select “SETUP” using { / B buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
SETUP menu will appear.  
Setup  
Playback Setting  
3
Select “Playback” using K / L / { /  
B
buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
Option window will appear.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Note  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
• Parental lock function may  
not be available to some  
discs.  
• With some DVDs, it may be  
difficult to find if they are  
compatible with parental lock.  
Be sure to check if the  
parental lock function oper-  
ates in the way that you have  
set.  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
OFF  
4
Select “Parental Lock” using K / L buttons, then press  
ENTER button.  
• Record the password in case  
you forget it.  
96  
Changing the SETUP menu  
Settings for Parental lock level (cont’d)  
Parental Lock (Default :All)  
Set the Parental Lock level.  
Change the parental level  
using K / L buttons, then  
press ENTER button.  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
4:3 Letter Box  
All  
TV Aspect  
etter Box  
All  
Parental Lock  
8
7
6
5
4
3
Parental Lock  
Option window will appear.  
Proceed to steps A or B.  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
English  
Original  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
inal  
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
ON  
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
A password has not been set yet  
A
Select “Yes” using s /  
B
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
buttons, then enter a new  
password using Number  
buttons.  
TV Aspect  
Change Password?  
Yes  
TV Aspect  
Password  
Yes  
No  
- - - -  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
7
7
6
5
4
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
6
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
inal  
inal  
5
4
3
Your setting will be activated.  
3
2
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
If you select “No”, proceed  
to Step 5.  
A password has been set already  
Change the password  
B
DVD  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
Setup > Playback  
DVD  
Setup > Playback  
TV Aspect  
TV Aspect  
etter Box  
All  
Change Password?  
TV Aspect  
Password  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
- - - -  
Password  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
* * * *  
7
7
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
ish  
6
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
ish  
6
6
inal  
inal  
inal  
5
5
5
4
4
4
Subtitle Language  
Digital Out  
3
3
3
2
2
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
Dynamic Range Control  
Fast Forward with Audio  
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
If you select “No”, proceed  
to Step 5.  
Enter the current password  
using Number buttons.  
Select “Yes” using s /  
B
buttons, then enter a new  
password using Number  
buttons.  
Your setting will be activated.  
Note  
• Press CLEAR/C.RESET button  
to erase numbers entered  
incorrectly.  
• When you forget the pass-  
word or you want to clear all  
settings in Parental lock, enter  
4,7,3,7 using Number buttons  
in option window. Password  
will be cleared and parental  
levels will be set to All.  
5
Press SETUP button to exit SETUP menu.  
97  
VCR functions  
Playback  
VCR  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
3
1
5
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
1
During playback, press  
Press POWER button on the  
remote control or the front  
panel of the unit.  
PAUSE F button.  
Playback will pause and sound will  
be muted.  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
When you are playing a tape, turn  
the TV on and be sure to select  
the input to which the unit is con-  
nected.  
STOP  
PLAY  
4
REW  
FWD  
2
4
PAUSE  
Press PLAY B button to  
VCR  
resume play.  
Press:  
3
Note  
5
2
• When a tape without record  
tab is inserted, the unit will  
start playback automatically.  
Tracking will be automatically  
adjusted upon playback.To  
adjust the tracking manually,  
press the CHANNEL K/L  
buttons on the front panel of  
the unit or CHK/CHL but-  
tons on the remote control.  
Insert a prerecorded tape,  
Press STOP C button to stop  
playback.  
then press PLAY B button to  
begin playback.  
6
Press STOP/EJECT  
C
A but-  
ton on the front panel of the  
unit to eject the tape.  
Recording and One-touch timer recording  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Recording  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
VCR  
First:  
VCR  
1
Before recording, make sure:  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
2
1
The desired channel is selected  
by pressing the number buttons  
on the remote control or  
1
PAUSE  
Press REC/OTR button to  
begin the recording.  
CHANNEL K/L buttons on the  
front panel of the unit.  
To temporarily stop recording or  
to resume it, press PAUSE F but-  
ton. After the unit has been in  
Pause mode for 5 minutes, it will  
stop automatically to protect the  
tape and the video head from  
damage.  
Note  
There is a tape with a record tab  
in the unit.  
To view one channel while  
recording another  
The desired recording speed is  
selected in SP (standard play) or  
SLP (super long play) mode by  
pressing REC SPEED button on  
the remote control.  
1) While you are recording on  
the unit, pressVIDEO/TV but-  
ton.  
2) At the cable box or satel-  
lite box, select the channel  
you want to view.  
If you have connected the unit to  
a cable box or satellite box, refer  
to “Connection to a Cable Box  
or Satellite Box” section on page  
14.  
If OTR is finished inVCR during  
playback or REC mode in DVD, the  
VCR will be in STOP mode and the  
DVD keeps the current mode.  
2
Recording speed:  
Tape speed  
Type of tape  
SP mode  
Recording/PlaybackTime  
Press STOP button when the  
recording is completed.  
T60  
T120  
2hours  
6hours  
T160  
2-2/3hours  
8hours  
1hour  
3hours  
SLP mode  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental recording  
on a recorded cassette, remove  
its record tab.To record on it  
later, cover the hole with cello-  
phane tape.  
Stereo or SAP is selected.  
Refer to page 36 for instructions  
on timer recording.  
Record tab  
98  
VCR functions  
Recording and One-touch timer recording (cont’d)  
One-touch timer recording  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
VCR  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
This feature allows you to set the  
recording length simply by pressing  
REC/OTR button on the remote  
control or the front panel of the unit.  
1
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
(Normal recording)  
(8:00)  
STOP  
PLAY  
(7:30)  
REW  
FWD  
1
PAUSE  
When one-touch timer recording  
is finished, the unit will turn off  
automatically.  
VCR  
First:  
1
To cancel the one-touch timer  
recording within the specified  
time, press STOP C button.  
Note  
During normal recording,  
press REC/OTR button to  
begin one-touch timer  
recording.  
• The remaining recording time  
will appear on the display  
panel during an OTR. Press  
DISPLAY button to see it on  
the TV screen.  
You can select a fixed recording  
time by pressing the REC/OTR  
button repeatedly.  
You cannot pause an OTR.  
Search  
Index search  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
VCR  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
3
An index mark will be assigned at  
the beginning of each recording  
you make.You may skip to a specif-  
ic marked point by following the  
steps below.  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Press g/h buttons to  
start index search.  
1
2
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
If you want to go in the forward  
direction, press g button.  
If you want to go in the reverse  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
VCR  
First:  
direction, press h button.  
After index search, theVCR will  
play the tape automatically.  
1
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Press SEARCH MODE button  
so that the index search  
menu appears.  
CURRENT PROGRAM  
Beginning  
of tape  
End  
of tape  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPEED  
Pro. 1  
Pro. 2  
Pro. 3  
Pro. 4  
Pro. 5  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
02  
01  
01  
02  
03  
2
INDEX MARK  
STOP  
PLAY  
Enter the number of record-  
ings you wish to skip using  
Number buttons with in 30  
seconds.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
3
3
INDEX SEARCH  
03  
Note  
• Every time a tape is recorded,  
an index mark is written on  
the tape.  
99  
VCR functions  
Search (cont’d)  
Time search  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
MODE  
VCR  
TIME SEARCH  
2:50  
1
2
3
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
This feature allows you to go to a  
specific point on a tape by enter-  
ing the exact amount of time you  
wish to skip in order to reach the  
point.  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
VCR  
First:  
3
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
Press g/h buttons to  
start time search.  
1
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
Press SEARCH MODE button  
repeatedly so that theTime  
search menu appears.  
If you want to go in the forward  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
direction, press  
If you want to go in the reverse  
direction, press button.  
After time search, the unit will play  
the tape automatically.  
g
button.  
STOP  
PLAY  
h
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
3
2
Enter your desired time to  
skip using Number buttons  
with in 30 seconds.  
Note  
• These functions are not avail-  
able during recording.  
• Press STOP button to stop the  
search.  
If the end of the tape is reached  
during a Search, this unit will cancel  
the search and rewind the tape.  
Other operations  
VCR  
VCR  
First:  
To cue or review picture during playback (Picture Search):  
Press g/h buttons during playback.  
Press it again and the unit will search in super high speed. (in the SLP  
mode only)  
To freeze the picture onTV screen during playback (Still mode):  
Press PAUSE F button. Each time you press the button, the picture will  
be forwarded by one frame.  
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still mode, stabilize  
the picture by pressing the CHANNEL K/L or CHK/CHL buttons.  
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the vertical hold  
control on your TV, if equipped.  
Note  
• Still/Slow/Pause mode will be  
automatically cancelled after 5  
minutes to prevent damage to  
the tape and the video head.  
To return to playback from  
the Picture Search/Still/Slow  
mode, press PLAY button.  
Counter Reset:  
Press CLEAR/C.RESET button.  
To playback in slow motion:  
Your Selection  
HIFI  
MONO  
Monaural  
L+R  
Press SLOW  
button during playback or the still mode.  
L-channel  
R-channel  
Type of recorded tape  
If the noise bars appear on the TV screen, you can reduce it by pressing  
non Hi-Fi tapes  
Monaural  
Monaural  
CHANNEL K/L or CHK/CHL buttons.  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded in  
Hi-Fi stereo  
L
R
When you playback a tape recorded in Hi-Fi stereo:  
Press AUDIO button on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or MONO  
for playback sound mode.  
• If you have connected a stereo TV to this unit, select “HIFI”.  
• If you have connected a monaural TV to this unit, select “MONO”.  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded main  
audio program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded second  
audio program  
Second audio Second audio Second audio  
program program program  
100  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are  
experiencing. Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and  
restore proper operation.  
Symptom  
Power  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.  
Picture  
• Re-connect the connecting cord securely.  
• The connecting cords are damaged.  
There is no picture.  
• The Setup Display appears. Press SETUP or RETURN  
button to turn off the display.  
• Check the connection to yourTV (page 13).  
• Check the RF output channel when you view aTV program  
using RF connection.  
• Check if the INTERLACE/PROGRESSIVE mode is set correctly  
according to yourTV. See page 13.  
• Switch the input selector on yourTV (such as to "LINE1") so  
that the signal from this unit appears on theTV screen.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
Picture noise appears.  
• Head cleaning forVCR may be necessary.  
Refer to “AUTO HEAD CLEANING”.  
If the picture output signal from the unit passes through yourVCR  
to get to yourTV, or if you are connected to a combination  
TV/VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD  
programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience this  
problem even when you connect the unit directly to yourTV, try  
connecting the unit to yourTV's S-VIDEO input.  
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing  
CHANNEL (o /p) buttons on this unit or CH (o /p)  
buttons while you are playing a video tape.  
Try to set the channels with "Auto Preset" in SETUP menu  
(page 18).  
TV program reception does not fill the  
screen.  
Select a channel of anyTV program using the CH  
o
/
p
buttons.  
• PressVIDEO/TV button if necessary.  
• AdjustTV antenna.  
TV program pictures are distorted.  
• Adjust the picture (see theTV's instruction manual).  
• Place the unit andTV farther apart.  
• Place theTV and any bunched antenna cables farther apart.  
• Switch the input toTV.  
• Connect the antenna cable correctly (page 13).  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
• If the playback picture output from a DVD player,VCR, or tuner  
goes through the unit before reaching yourTV, the copy-  
protection signal applied to some programs could affect picture  
quality. Disconnect the playback equipment in question and  
connect it directly to yourTV.  
The playback picture orTV program from  
the equipment connected through the  
unit is distorted.  
Sound  
There is no sound.  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
• Re-connect all connections securely.  
• The connecting cord is damaged.  
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.  
• The input source setting on the amplifier is incorrect.  
• The unit is in pause mode or in Slow-motion Play mode.  
• The unit is in fast forward or fast reverse mode.  
• If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT jacks, check the Audio Setup settings (pages 94-95).  
• The disc is dirty or flawed.  
Sound is noisy.  
101  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Remedy  
Symptom  
Playback  
• No disc is inserted.  
The disc does not play.  
• A blank disc is inserted.  
• No cassette tape is inserted.  
The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.  
• The disc is not correctly inserted.  
• The unit cannot play certain discs (such as a CD-ROM) (page  
46).  
• The region code on the DVDVIDEO does not match the unit  
(page 46).  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and  
leave the unit turned on at least for 2 hours until the moisture  
evaporates (page 4).  
• If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot  
play the disc if it was not finalized (page 44).  
The disc does not start playback from the • Resume play was activated (page 51). Press STOP C button  
beginning.  
twice.  
You have inserted a disc whoseTitle menu or DVD menu  
automatically appears on theTV screen when it is first insert.  
The unit starts playing from the disc  
automatically.  
• The DVDVIDEO features an auto playback function.  
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or  
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.  
Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the  
operations above. See the instruction manual supplied with the disc.  
• Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO,  
DVD-R or DVD-RW being played.  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the  
sound track.  
Try changing the language using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
The language for the sound track cannot  
be changed.  
The subtitle language cannot be changed  
or turned off.  
• Multilingual subtitle are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO.  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles.  
Try changing the subtitle using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVDVIDEO being played.  
You are trying to change the angles when  
appear on theTV screen (page 62).  
• The DVDVIDEO prohibits changing angles.  
Try changing the angle using the DVDVIDEO's menu.  
The angles cannot be changed.  
icon does not  
Recording/Timer recording/Editing  
The channel cannot be changed from the  
channel you are recording.  
• Set theTV's input to "TV".  
Recording does not start immediately  
after you press REC/OTR button.  
• An unused DVD-R or DVD-RW was inserted. It takes a while  
for the unit to automatically format a DVD-RW.  
• Make sure the tape has a record tab when you record to a  
cassette tape. If needed, cover the hole with cellophane tape.  
•There was a power failure during recording.  
• The units internal clock stopped due to a power failure that  
lasted for more than 30 seconds.  
Nothing was recorded even though you  
set the timer setting correctly.  
Reset the clock (pages 24-25).  
• Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet, and  
connect it again.  
The program contains copy protection signals that restricts copying.  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was set  
later or has priority.  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press STOP C button.  
• It will take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before  
recording can stop.  
Timer recording is not complete or did  
not start from the beginning.  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that was set  
later or has priority (page 38).  
• Disc space was not enough.  
Make sure indicator appears on the front display of this unit. If not,  
press POWER button.  
Timer recording is impossible.  
102  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Remedy  
Symptom  
Remote control  
• Batteries are weak.  
The remote control does not function.  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the unit.  
• The remote control is far from the unit.  
• There are no batteries in the remote control.  
Turn on the unit.  
• The remote control is not pointed at the remote sensor on the  
unit.  
Press the DVD orVCR button, whichever you need.Then, try  
again.  
Others  
The unit does not operate properly.  
• When static electricity, etc., causes the unit to operate  
abnormally, unplug the unit and then plug it in again.  
The disc tray does not open when you  
press OPEN/CLOSE A button.  
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you  
have recorded or edited a disc.  
• This is because the unit is adding disc data to the disc.  
"Repairing" appears on the display.  
• If there is a power failure or unplugging during recording,  
finalizing, formatting or editing, a Repairing process will begin  
automatically just after turning the unit on again.  
Repairing  
It may take several minutes up to about four hours.  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Disc Error  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
Playback feature may not be  
available on this Disc.  
Unplayable disc is inserted  
in the DVD recorder.  
Insert the standardized disc which  
bear the marks on page 46.  
Region Error  
Playback is not authorized  
because the region code of the  
DVD video disc you inserted  
is different.  
Insert the DVD-Video disc with  
region codes 1 or ALL.  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
Playback is not authorized in your  
region.  
Parental Lock On  
--- Please eject the disc. ---  
The current selected parental level  
Prohibits playback.  
The current selected parental  
level in the SETUP Menu  
prohibits playback.  
Check the "Parental Lock" setting  
(pages 96-97).  
Recording Error  
The recording function encountered  
the copy prohibited program.  
You cannot record copy prohibited  
programs.  
This program is not allowed  
to be recorded.  
Recording Error  
This program is not  
recordable inVideo mode.  
You are trying to record the copy-  
once program onto the DVD-RW  
disc inVideo mode or the DVD-R  
disc.  
Set "DVD-RW Recording Format"  
to "VR mode" (page 30-31).  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record onto the  
disc which is unrecordable, or the  
disc status prevents recording.  
Insert the recordable disc, and  
ensure the disc status satisfies  
the recording requirements  
(pages 28-45).  
Can not record on this disc.  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record a copy-  
once program onto a DVD-RW  
disc which is not compatible with  
CPRM.  
Insert a ver.1.1 CPRM compatible  
DVD-RW disc (page 29).  
This program is not allowed to  
be recorded on this disc.  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record on to the  
protected disc which is set in the  
Disc Setting Menu.  
Release the disc protect setting  
in the Disc Setting menu (page 45).  
This disc is protected and not  
recordable.  
103  
Others  
Troubleshooting (cont’d)  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Recording Error  
Disc is full.  
You are trying to record onto  
the disc which has no space  
for recording.  
Insert the recordable disc with  
enough recording space.  
(No area for new recording)  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record onto the  
disc on which the number of  
recording titles comes up to the  
maximum (99).  
Delete unnecessary titles  
(pages 65, 69, 78).  
You cannot record more  
than 99 titles on one disc.  
(The maximum is 99)  
Recording Error  
You cannot record more the  
999 chapters on one disc.  
You are trying to record onto the  
VR mode DVD-RW disc on which  
the number of recording chapters  
comes up to the maximum (999).  
Delete unnecessary chapter  
markers (pages 73, 82).  
(The maximum is 999)  
Recording Error  
This disc has no space to write  
the Control Information when  
recording or deleting contents.  
Delete unnecessary titles  
(pages 65, 69, 78).  
You cannot record on this disc  
as Control Information is full.  
When editing has been repeatedly  
performed, the control Information  
area may come up to be full even  
the recording area has enough space.  
Recording Error  
This disc's working area for  
recording is full.  
Insert a new disc.  
You cannot record on the  
disc as Power Calibration  
Area is full.  
When recordings are performed  
repeatedly onto an unstable disc,  
this area may come up to be full.  
Recording Error  
You are trying to record onto  
the disc already finalized.  
Release the finalizing for this disc  
(page 44).  
This disc is already finalized.  
*
If you are still having trouble with this unit after checking Troubleshooting, write down the error code and the  
error description for calling our help line mentioned on the front page to locate an Authorized service center.  
RF converter output  
You can watch the TV programs with the tuner of the  
unit. (Usually channel 3 or 4 of the TV is available for  
the RF converter setting.) Be sure to connect the unit  
to a TV using the RF cable. Refer to page 13.  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
C/OTR  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
1
SPACE  
ZOOM  
for more than  
3 seconds  
CLEAR/  
REC  
Select channel 3 on yourTV.  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
• Be sure that the unit is in DVD mode.  
MENU/LIST  
3 seconds  
2
(
(
(
)
RF ON CH4  
PressVIDEO/TV button on the remote control.  
• If noise appears, change the RF output channel  
of the unit to CH 4 by pressingVIDEO/TV but-  
ton for 3 seconds.The RF output channel will  
alternate between CH3 and CH4 as follows.  
• Changing the RF output channel is available only  
when the unit is in DVD mode.  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
3 seconds  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
)
2
RF ON CH3  
REC  
SPEED  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
3 seconds  
)
RF ON CH4  
3 seconds  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
104  
Others  
Language code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
Language  
Code  
(Afan) Oromo  
Abkhazian  
Afar  
Afrikaans  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Armenian  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
6159  
4748  
4747  
4752  
6563  
4759  
4764  
5471  
4765  
4771  
4772  
4847  
5167  
4860  
5072  
4854  
4855  
4864  
4853  
5971  
4851  
5759  
4947  
7254  
4961  
5464  
4965  
5047  
6058  
5160  
5161  
5166  
5261  
5256  
5255  
5264  
5271  
5358  
5747  
5051  
5158  
5758  
5360  
5367  
5447  
5569  
Hindi  
5455  
5467  
5565  
5560  
5547  
5551  
5557  
5347  
5566  
5647  
5669  
5760  
5765  
5757  
6469  
5771  
6460  
5761  
5767  
5861  
5847  
5868  
5860  
5866  
5957  
5953  
5965  
5958  
5966  
5955  
5964  
5961  
5960  
6047  
6051  
6061  
6149  
6164  
6247  
6265  
5247  
6258  
6266  
6367  
6459  
6461  
Russian  
Samoan  
Sangho  
Sanskrit  
Scots Gaelic  
Serbian  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sesotho  
Setswana  
Shona  
Sindhi  
Singhalese  
Siswat  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Somali  
Spanish  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Swedish  
Tagalog  
Tajik  
Tamil  
Tatar  
Telugu  
Thai  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tonga  
Tsonga  
Turkish  
Turkmen  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Welsh  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
6467  
6559  
6553  
6547  
5350  
6564  
6554  
6566  
6660  
6560  
6550  
6555  
6565  
6557  
6558  
6561  
5165  
6567  
6569  
6568  
6658  
6653  
6647  
6666  
6651  
6654  
4861  
6655  
6661  
6665  
6664  
6657  
6669  
6757  
6764  
6772  
6855  
6861  
4971  
6961  
7054  
5655  
7161  
7267  
Hungarian  
Icelandic  
Indonesian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Irish  
Italian  
Japanese  
Javanese  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kazakh  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Kirundi  
Korean  
Kurdish  
Laothian  
Latin  
Latvian; Lettish  
Lingala  
Lithuanian  
Macedonian  
Malagasy  
Malay  
Malayalam  
Maltese  
Maori  
Marathi  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Pashto; Pushto  
Persian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
Basque  
Bengali;Bangla  
Bhutani  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Breton  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Byelorussian  
Cambodian  
Catalan  
Chinese  
Corsican  
Croatian  
Czech  
Danish  
Dutch  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Faroese  
Fiji  
Finnish  
French  
Frisian  
Galician  
Georgian  
German  
Greek  
Greenlandic  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hebrew  
105  
Others  
Glossary  
Dolby Digital  
Analog audio  
Regions code  
An electrical signal that directly  
represents sound. Compare this  
to digital audio which can be an  
electrical signal, but is an indirect  
representation of sound. See also  
Digital audio.  
The system to compress digital  
sound developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. It offers you sound  
of stereo(2ch) or multi-channel  
audio (up to 5.1ch).  
Regions associate discs and play-  
ers with particular areas of the  
world.This unit will only play discs  
that have compatible region  
codes.You can find the region  
code of your unit by looking on  
the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one  
region (or all regions).  
DTS (DigitalTheater System)  
DTS is a 5.1 channel surround  
sound system, but it is different  
Aspect ratio  
The width of a TV screen relative  
to its height. Conventional TVs are from Dolby Digital.The formats  
4:3 (in other words, the screen is  
almost square); widescreen mod-  
els are 16:9 (the screen is almost  
twice as wide as it is high).  
Sampling frequency  
were developed by Digital Theater  
System, Inc.  
The rate which sound is measured  
by a specified interval to turn into  
digital audio data.The numbers of  
sampling in one second defines as  
sampling frequency.The higher the  
rate, the better the sound quality  
as possible as it is.  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
MP3 is a method of compressing  
files.You can copy MP3 files on  
CD-R/RW discs from the comput-  
er and play the files on this unit.  
Chapter  
Just as a book is split up into sev-  
eral chapters, a title on a DVD  
disc is usually divided into chap-  
ters. See also Title.  
Finalize  
SAP  
(Secondary Audio Program)  
To make DVD discs, which have  
been recorded on, possible to play  
in DVD players.With this unit, it is  
possible to finalize DVD-R/DVD-  
Component video output  
Each signal of luminance(Y) and  
component(PB/CB, PR/CR) is inde-  
pendent to output so that you can RW discs.  
experience picture color as it is.  
Also, due to compatibility with  
progressive video (525p/480p),  
you can experience higher-density  
picture than that in interlace  
(525i/480i).  
Sub-audio channel which is deliv-  
ered separately from main-audio  
channel.This audio channel is used  
as an alternate in bilingual broad-  
casting.  
PCM  
(Pulse Code Modulation)  
S-Video output  
The most common system of  
It delivers independently each sig-  
nal of color(C) and luminance(Y)  
to TV as video signals, so that  
higher-quality picture will be  
gained.  
encoding digital audio, found on  
CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but  
requires a lot of data compared to  
formats such as Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio. For compatibility with  
digital audio recorders (CD, MD  
and DAT) and AV amplifiers with  
CPRM  
(Content Protection for  
Recordable Media)  
CPRM is a copy protection sys-  
tem with scramble system regard- digital inputs, this unit can convert  
Title (DVD only)  
A collection of chapters on DVD  
disc. See also chapter.  
ing the recording of “copy-once”  
broadcast programs (e.g. some  
satellite broadcasts).  
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio to  
PCM. See also Digital audio.  
Track  
Audio CDs use tracks to divide  
up the content of a disc.The DVD  
equivalent is called a chapter. See  
Playlist  
Digital audio  
An indirect representation of  
sound by numbers. During record- sequence.Also it is allowed to  
From this list you can play contents  
of a disc as your desired order or in also Chapter.  
VCR Plus+ system  
ing, the sound is measured at dis-  
crete intervals (44, 100 times a  
second for CD audio) by an ana-  
log-to-digital converter, generating  
a stream of numbers. On playback,  
a digital-to-analog converter gen-  
erates an analog signal based on  
these numbers. See also Sampling  
frequency and Analog audio.  
search a specific scene directly.  
Allows you to set a timer record-  
ing by entering a PlusCode num-  
ber found in participating TV list-  
ings.  
Progressive Scan (525p/480p)  
A type of display that does not  
split each frame into fields, and  
instead scans directly through all  
the scanlines of each frame in  
order. Progressive Scan provides  
less flickering and higher image  
resolution than traditional  
(525i/480i) TV signals. Refer to  
page 13 for instructions on selec-  
tive Progressive Scan mode.  
106  
Others  
Specifications  
General  
System  
DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, CD-DA, CD-R/RW,  
Video CassetteTape  
VCR video heads  
Four heads  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Weight  
AC120V, 60 Hz  
37W (standby: 4.3W)  
9.5 lbs ( 4.3 kg )  
Dimensions (width x height x depth)  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
TV format  
17 1/8" x 3 15/16" x 10 1/4" (435 x 100 x 261 mm)  
41Fº to 104Fº (5ºC to 40ºC)  
5% to 85% (no condensation)  
NTSC  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
VHF  
2-13ch  
UHF  
CATV  
14-69ch  
C1-C125ch  
RF Converter  
Converter output  
Built-inVHF converter  
VHF channel 3 or 4  
Note:  
The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.  
107  
Español  
Fácil grabación de DVD  
Estas instrucciones le ayudarán a entender fácilmente cómo grabar discos DVD.  
Nota:  
Asegúrese que las pilas están en el mando a distancia y que ha conectado correctamente esta unidad y el TV.  
Paso 1: Elija un tipo de disco  
Paso 2:  
Coloque un  
disco en blanco  
Paso 3:  
Seleccione la veloci-  
dad de grabación  
Hay varias tipos de discos DVD  
grabables a su elección. Elija un tipo de  
disco DVD que se pueda grabar según  
sus necesidades de reproducción/  
grabación/edición. Elija el tipo según  
"Tipos de disco DVD" en esta página.  
Este grabador de DVD puede  
grabar en los siguientes tipos de  
disco.  
Para encender  
1
2
3
Para seleccionar el  
modo DVD  
1
Para abrir  
Para cerrar  
Para seleccionar la  
2
velocidad de grabación  
Mando a distancia  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
1
(o)  
OPEN/  
2
POWER  
CLOSE  
1
2
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
RETURN  
SETUP  
* Esta unidad no puede grabar en los  
discos siguientes.  
SEARCH  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
• DVD-R GeneralVer 2.0 / 8x  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2 / 2-4x compatible  
con CPRM  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
STOP  
PLAY  
Por ejemplo, cuando desea grabar  
repetidamente en el mismo disco o  
cuando desea editar el disco  
después de grabar, seleccione el  
disco de tipo regrabable DVD-RW.  
Cuando desea guardar  
grabaciones sin alterarlos, un DVD  
no regrabable DVD-R puede ser  
más conveniente.  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
3
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
SEARCH  
SP 2:01 Rem.  
Cargando  
Esta operación  
puede demorar en  
reconocerse.  
Tipos de disco DVD  
Formato del disco  
Coloque el disco en el  
: Más adecuado  
: Puede utilizar  
:
Algunas funciones son limitadas  
: No puede utilizar  
grabador. Haga el formato del  
disco del menú SETUP,  
existen los formatos de video  
(modo deVideo) o de  
grabación de video (modo  
VR) según el tipo de disco  
colocado. Esto es necesario  
para preparar el disco para  
grabación.Vea los detalles  
en las páginas 30-32.  
Desea  
Grabar programas deTV  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
Volver a utilizar borrando partes no deseadas  
Editar las grabaciones  
Editar/grabar de equipos conectados  
Copiar discos para distribución  
Reproducir en otro equipo de DVD  
*1  
*1  
Detalles  
Grabación  
¿Regrabable?  
DVD-RW VR  
DVD-RW Video  
DVD-R  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
No  
Sí  
Puede crear capítulos a intervalos fijos (auto.)  
Puede crear capítulos donde desee (manual)  
Puede grabar imágenes de tamaño 16:9  
No  
Sí  
No  
Sí  
* Al formatear, todo el  
contenido de ese disco se  
borrarán.  
Puede grabar un programa de Copia-una-vez  
No  
No  
Edición  
Puede hacer funciones de edición básica  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Sí  
Puede hacer funciones de edición avanzadas (edición de lista a reproducir)  
No  
No  
*1  
El DVD-RW (modoVR) sólo puede  
reproducirse en equipos de DVD compatibles  
conVR.  
Nota:  
Para más detalles sobre las funciones anteriores y las  
limitaciones implícitas, lea las explicaciones en este manual.  
108  
Español  
Fácil grabación de DVD (cont.)  
Paso 4:  
Seleccione el canal  
deseado  
Paso 5:  
Grabe en discos  
DVD  
Paso 6:  
Pare la grabación  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
D
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
PAUSE  
SEARCH  
MODE  
RETURN  
SETUP  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
C.RESET MONITOR  
58%  
Escrit de datos  
STOP  
PLAY  
SKIP  
CH  
STOP  
REW  
PLAY  
FWD  
CH 1  
Esta operación puede  
demorar en completarse.  
I
Sugerencia 1: Reproduzca el contenido grabado  
Parada grab.  
Inicio de grab.  
Parada/inicio  
Puede seleccionar el título que desea reproducir de un menú indica-  
do y empiece a reproducir inmediatamente. Las grabaciones pueden  
verse fácilmente en un disco, el procedimiento es simple ya que sólo  
tiene que elegir el título en un capítulo de la pantalla del menú.  
Título 1  
Título 2  
¿Qué son títulos y capítulos?  
La grabaciones del disco DVD se dividen generalmente en títulos.  
Los títulos pueden subdividirse en capítulos.  
Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2 Capítulo 3 Capítulo 1 Capítulo 2  
Sugerencia 2: Edite el disco grabado  
La edición de discos puede ser muy fácil y el grabador de DVD ofrece convenientes funciones de edición  
posibles sólo con los DVD-R/RW.  
Puede editar lo siguiente de la lista de títulos.  
• Poniendo nombres en títulos  
• Seleccionando imágenes para índices (modoVR)  
• Seleccionando/borrando marcadores de capítulos  
• Borrado de partes de títulos o escenas (ModoVR)  
Title Delete: Esto borra permanentemente una escena completa del disco.  
Scene Delete: Esto permite que el usuario edite dentro de una escena específica (anuncios comerciales, por ejemplo).  
Original y Playlist (modoVR)  
Puede editar las grabaciones en la lista a reproducir sin cambiar las grabaciones originales. Cualquier lista a  
reproducir no ocupa mucho espacio en el disco.  
¿Qué significa "Original" o "Playlist"?  
A lo largo de este manual encontrará Original y Playlist que se refieren a las grabaciones reales y la versión edi-  
tada.  
• La grabación Original se refiere a la grabación real en el disco.  
• El Playlist se refiere a la versión editada del disco; cómo se va a reproducir la versión Original.  
Finalización de un disco  
• Esto permitirá que un disco que se grabe en nuestra unidad pueda ser reproducido en un reproductor  
DVD diferente. Un disco sin finalizar no se podrá reproducir en otro reproductor.  
Después de finalizar un disco, si la grabación se hizo en el modo de vídeo, usted no podrá editar ninguna infor-  
mación que se encuentre en ese disco.  
• Si ha grabado en el modoVR en un disco DVD-RW, la edición podrá realizarse incluso después de la  
finalización.  
109  
Español  
Reproducción con videograbadora  
VCR  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
3
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
1
Durante la reproducción, pre-  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Presione el botón POWER en  
el mando a distancia o el  
panel frontal de la unidad.  
Cuando reproduzca una cinta,  
conecte el TV y asegúrese de  
seleccionar la entrada donde se  
conecta la unidad.  
sione el botón PAUSE F.  
Se hará una pausa de reproduc-  
ción y se silenciará el sonido.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
MENU/LIST  
4
Presione el botón PLAY  
B
VCR  
para continuar la reproduc-  
ción.  
Presione:  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
2
REC  
SPEED  
5
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Coloque una cinta pregraba-  
da y presione el botón PLAY  
Presione el botón STOP  
C
para detener la reproducción.  
B para empezar la reproduc-  
ción.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
5
3
2
4
PAUSE  
6
Presione el botón  
STOP/EJECT  
C
A en el panel  
frontal de la unidad para  
expulsar la cinta.  
Nota  
• Cuando se coloca una cinta  
sin la lengüeta de grabación, la  
unidad empezará a reproducir  
automáticamente.  
• El seguimiento se ajustará  
automáticamente para la  
reproducción. Para ajustar  
manualmente el seguimiento,  
presione los botones CHAN-  
NEL K/L en el panel frontal  
de la unidad o los botones  
CHK/CHL en el mando a  
distancia.  
110  
Español  
Grabación y grabación con temporizador de un toque (VCR)  
Grabación  
VCR  
Primero:  
VCR  
RETURN  
SETUP  
Antes de grabar, asegúrese de que:  
Se seleccionó el canal deseado  
presionando los botones numéri-  
cos en el mando a distancia o  
botones CHANNEL K/L en el  
panel frontal de la unidad.  
Hay una cinta con la lengüeta  
para grabación intacta en la  
unidad.  
Se seleccionó la velocidad de  
grabación deseada en SP (repro-  
ducción estándar) o SLP (repro-  
ducción de super larga duración)  
presionando el botón REC  
SPEED en el mando a distancia.  
1
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
Presione el botón REC/OTR  
para empezar la grabación.  
Para detener temporalmente la  
grabación o continuarla, presione  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
1
1
STOP  
PLAY  
2
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
el botón PAUSE F. Después de  
que la unidad haya estado en el  
modo de pausa durante 5 minu-  
tos, se detendrá automáticamente  
para proteger al cinta y el cabezal  
de video contra cambios.  
Nota  
• Para ver un canal mientras  
graba en otro  
1) Mientras está grabando en  
la unidad, presione el botón  
VIDEO/TV.  
2) En la caja de cable o caja  
de satélite, seleccione el canal  
que desea ver.  
Si se conectó la unidad a una  
caja de cable o caja de satélite,  
consulte la sección de  
2
Velocidad de grabación:  
Presione el botón STOP  
cuando se complete la  
grabación.  
Velocidad  
de la cinta  
Tiempo de  
grabación/reproducción  
Tipo de cinta  
Modo SP  
T60  
T120  
T160  
1 hora  
2 horas 2-2/3 horas  
Prevención contra borrado accidental  
Para evitar una grabación por  
accidente en un casete grabado,  
rompa la lengüeta de grabación.  
Para volver a grabar posterior-  
Modo SLP  
3 horas  
6 horas  
8 horas  
Se selecciona Estéreo o SAP.  
"Connection to a cable box or  
satellite box" en la página 14.  
Lengüeta de  
grabación  
mente, cubra el orificio con  
cinta adhesiva.  
Grabación con temporizador de un toque (OTR)  
VCR  
Cuando termina la grabación con  
Esta función permite seleccionar  
temporizador de un toque, la  
la longitud de la grabación simple-  
unidad se desconectará automáti-  
RETURN  
SETUP  
mente presionando el botón  
camente.  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC/OTR en el mando a distancia  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
o en el panel frontal de la unidad.  
Para cancelar la grabación con  
1
VCR  
Primero:  
temporizador de un toque dentro  
del tiempo especificado, presione  
el botón STOP C.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
1
PAUSE  
1
Durante la grabación normal,  
presione el botón REC/OTR  
para empezar la grabación  
con temporizador de un  
toque.  
Nota  
• Aparecerá el tiempo de grabación restante en el panel de  
visualización durante una OTR. Presione el botón DISPLAY  
para que aparezcalo en la pantalla del televisor.  
Puede seleccionar un tiempo de  
grabación determinado presionan-  
do repetidamente el botón  
REC/OTR.  
• No puede hacer una pausa en una OTR.  
Si se termina el OTR en la videograbadora durante el modo de  
reproducción o REC en DVD, la videograbadora estará en el  
modo STOP y la DVD se mantiene en el modo actual.  
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
(Grabación normal)  
(8:00)  
(7:30)  
111  
Français  
Enregistrement simple de DVD  
Ce qui suit permettra de comprendre facilement comment enregistrer sur des disques DVD.  
Remarque :  
Vérifier la présence de piles dans la télécommande et le raccordement correct de cet appareil et du téléviseur.  
Étape 1 :  
Choisir un type de disque  
Il y a plusieurs types de disques DVD  
enregistrables. Choisir un type de disque DVD  
enregistrable sur la base de ses propres besoins  
de lecture/enregistrement/montage. Voir “Types  
de disque DVD” au bas de cette page pour les  
détails sur les différences entre les divers  
genres de supports compatibles.  
Étape 2 :  
Étape 3 :  
Sélectionner la vitesse  
d’enregistrement  
Insérer un  
disque vierge  
Mettre l’appareil sous ten-  
1
2
sion.  
Pour sélectionner le  
mode DVD  
1
Ouvrir le tiroir à  
disque.  
Fermer le tiroir à  
Pour sélectionner la  
vitesse d’enregistrement  
3
disque.  
2
Télécommande  
Cet appareil peut enregistrer sur les  
types de disques suivants.  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
1
2
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
1
(ou)  
SEARCH  
RETURN  
SETUP  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
*Cet appareil ne peut pas enregistrer sur  
les disques suivants.  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
• DVD-RWVer 1.2/2-4x compatible CPRM  
• DVD-R ordinaireVer 2.0/8x  
STOP  
PLAY  
3
2
REW  
FWD  
OPEN/  
PAUSE  
Par exemple, pour enregistrer à  
répétition sur le même disque, ou  
pour éditer le disque après l’enre-  
gistrement, sélectionner un disque  
de type DVD-RW réinscriptible.  
POWER  
CLOSE  
+
.@/:  
ABC  
DEF  
VCR Plus  
SP 2:01 Rem.  
Loading  
Pour sauvegarder des enregistre-  
ments sans aucune modification, un  
DVD-R non-inscriptible peut faire  
l’affaire.  
La reconnaissance de  
cette opération peut  
exiger un certain temps.  
Formatage du disque  
Insérer le disque dans  
l’appareil. Puis, formater le  
disque au menu  
Types de disques DVD  
CONFIGURER. Le format  
Vidéo (modeVidéo) ou le  
format d’enregistrement  
vidéo (modeVR) sera  
disponible selon le type de  
disque inséré. Cela est  
nécessaire pour préparer le  
disque pour l’enregistre-  
ment.Voir les détails aux  
pages 30-32.  
112  
Français  
Enregistrement simple de DVD (suite)  
Étape 4 :  
Sélectionner la  
chaîne souhaitée  
Étape 5 :  
Enregistrer sur  
des disques DVD  
Étape 6 :  
Arrêter l’enregistrement.  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
MENU/LIST  
TOP MENU  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
STOP  
PLAY  
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
REW  
SEARCH  
MODE  
PAUSE  
RETURN  
SETUP  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
REC  
CLEAR/  
REC  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
C.RESET MONITOR  
REC  
SPEED  
58%  
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Escrit de datos  
STOP  
PLAY  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
CH 1  
Cette opération peut  
I
demander un certain temps.  
Conseil 1: Lire le contenu enregistré  
Le titre à lire peut être sélectionné au menu affiché, et la lecture  
peut commencer immédiatement. Le contenu enregistré est très  
accessible sur un disque, la procédure est vraiment simple,  
comme si on choisissait un titre de chapitre à l’écran de menu.  
Démarrer enr.  
Arrêt/Démarrer  
Titre 2  
Arrêter enr.  
Titre 1  
Qu’est-ce que titres et chapitres?  
Les matériaux du disque DVD sont généralement divisés en  
plusieurs titres. Les titres peuvent encore être subdivisés en  
chapitres.  
Chapitre 1 Chapitre 2 Chapitre 3 Chapitre 1 Chapitre 2  
Conseil 2: Monter le disque enregistré  
Le montage des disques est très simple; cet appareil offre des fonctions de montage pratiques, utilisables seule-  
ment avec les disques DVD-R/RW.  
Ce qui suit peut être monté à partir d’une liste de titres.  
• Dénomination de titres  
• Réglage d’images pour les images miniatures (modeVR)  
• Réglage/suppression de marques de chapitres  
• Suppression de parties de titres (modeVR)  
Suppression de titre : Supprime de façon permanente toute une scène du disque.  
Suppression de scène : Permet à l’utilisateur le montage à l’intérieur d’une scène spécifique (par ex. publicité).  
Original et Playlist (modeVR)  
Il est possible de monter les enregistrements dans la Playlist sans changer les enregistrements originaux. Une  
Playlist n’utilise pas beaucoup d’espace du disque.  
À quoi servent “Original” ou “Playlist”?  
Dans ce manuel, Original et Playlist seront utilisés pour référer aux matériaux réels et à la version montée.  
Les matériaux Original réfèrent à ce qui est réellement enregistré sur le disque.  
Les matériaux Playlist réfèrent à la version montée du disque; comment les matériaux Original  
seront lus.  
Finalisation d’un disque  
• Permet la lecture d’un disque enregistré sur cet appareil sur un lecteur de DVD différent – sans finali-  
sation, la lecture sur un autre lecteur est impossible.  
• Après la finalisation d’un disque, si l’enregistrement a été fait en mode vidéo, il sera imposible de mon-  
ter toute information sur ce disque.  
• En cas d’enregistrement en modeVR sur un disque DVD-RW, le montage est encore possible après la  
finalisation.  
113  
Français  
Lecture avec magnétoscope  
VCR  
OPEN/  
POWER  
CLOSE  
3
1
1
+
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
VCR Plus  
Pendant la lecture, appuyer  
SEARCH  
MODE  
Appuyer sur la touche  
POWER sur la télécommande  
ou sur le panneau avant de  
l’appareil.  
sur la touche PAUSE F.  
L’appareil passera en pause et le  
son sera assourdi.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CM SKIP  
SPACE  
ZOOM  
CLEAR/  
REC  
AUDIO DISPLAY  
TOP MENU  
C.RESET MONITOR  
Pour lire une cassette, allumer le  
téléviseur et bien sélectionner  
l’entrée à laquelle l’appareil est  
raccordé.  
MENU/LIST  
4
Appuyer sur la touche  
PLAY B pour reprendre la  
lecture.  
VCR  
Appuyer sur :  
RETURN  
VCR  
SETUP  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
5
REC  
SPEED  
2
SLOW  
SKIP  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Appuyer sur la touche STOP  
pour arrêter la lecture.  
C
Insérer une cassette  
préenregistrée, puis appuyer  
sur la touche PLAY B pour  
démarrer la lecture.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
5
3
2
4
PAUSE  
6
Appuyer sur la touche  
STOP/EJECT  
C
A sur le  
panneau avant de l’appareil  
pour éjecter la cassette.  
Remarques  
• Quand une cassette sans  
ergot d’enregistrement est  
insérée, l’appareil démarre  
automatiquement la lecture.  
L’alignement sera automatiquement  
ajusté à la lecture. Pour ajuster  
manuellement l’alignement, appuyer  
sur les touches CHANNEL  
K/L  
sur le panneau avant de l’appareil  
ou sur les touches CHK/CH  
L
de  
la télécommande.  
114  
Français  
Enregistrement avec magnétoscope  
Enregistrement  
VCR  
D’abord:  
VCR  
RETURN  
SETUP  
Avant l’enregistrement, vérifier que:  
• La chaîne souhaitée est  
sélectionnée en appuyant sur les  
touches numériques de la  
1
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
REC  
Appuyer sur la touche  
REC/OTR pour démarrer  
l’enregistrement.  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
1
1
télécommande ou sur les touches  
STOP  
PLAY  
CHANNEL K/L sur le panneau  
2
Pour temporairement arrêter l’enre-  
gistrement ou le reprendre, appuyer  
REW  
FWD  
PAUSE  
avant de l’appareil  
.
• Il y a une cassette avec ergot  
d’enregistrement dans l’appareil.  
• La vitesse d’enregistrement  
souhaitée (SP – lecture standard  
ou SLP – lecture super longue)  
peut être sélectionnée en  
sur la touche PAUSE  
F. Après être  
resté en mode de pause 5 minutes,  
l’appareil s’arrête automatiquement  
pour protéger la cassette et la tête  
vidéo contre les dommages.  
Remarques  
Pour visionner une chaîne pendant  
l’enregistrement d’une autre  
1) Pendant l’enregistrement sur  
cet appareil, appuyer sur la  
toucheVIDEO/TV.  
2) Sur la boîte de câblovision ou  
la boîte satellite, sélectionner la  
chaîne à visualiser.  
Si cet appareil est raccordé à une  
boîte de câblovision ou une boîte  
satellite, se reporter à la section  
“Connection to a cable box or  
satellite box” à la page 14.  
appuyant sur la touche REC  
SPEED sur la télécommande.  
Vitesse d’enregistrement :  
2
Appuyer sur la touche STOP quand  
l’enregistrement est terminé.  
Vitesse  
de la bande  
Durée de  
l’enregistrement/lecture  
Tipe de cassette  
Mode SP  
T60  
T120  
2 heures 2-2/3 heures  
6 heures 8 heures  
T160  
Prévention de l’effacement accidentel  
Pour prévenir l’enregistrement acciden-  
tel sur une cassette enregistrée, briser  
son ergot d’enregistrement. Pour réen-  
registrer dessus par la suite, couvrir le  
1 heure  
3 heures  
Mode SLP  
Stéréo ou SAP est sélectionné :  
Ergot d'enregistrement  
trou de ruban adhésif.  
Enregistrement avec minuterie par simple pression  
(OTR)  
VCR  
Quand l’enregistrement avec  
Cette fonction permet de régler la  
minuterie par simple pression est  
longueur d’enregistrement en  
terminé, l’appareil se met  
RETURN  
SETUP  
appuyant sur la touche REC/OTR  
automatiquement hors tension.  
VCR  
VIDEO/TV  
DVD  
de la télécommande ou sur le  
REC  
panneau avant de l’appareil.  
SLOW  
SKIP  
SPEED  
REC/OTR  
CH  
Pour annuler l’enregistrement avec  
1
VCR  
D’abord :  
minuterie par simple pression  
pendant le temps spécifié, appuyer  
sur la touche STOP C.  
STOP  
PLAY  
REW  
FWD  
1
PAUSE  
1
Pendant l’enregistrement normal,  
appuyez sur la touche REC/OTR  
pour commencer l’enregistrement  
avec minuterie par simple pression.  
Pour sélectionner un temps  
d’enregsitrement fixe, appuyez  
plusieurs fois sur la touche  
REC/OTR.  
Remarques  
• La durée restante pour l’enre-  
gistrement apparaît sur l’affichage  
de panneau avant pendant l’enre-  
gistrement par l’OTR.  
Une pause n’est pas possible pour  
l’enregistrement par l’OTR.  
Si un enregistrement par l’OTR est  
términé dans le magnétscope tan-  
dis que le DVD est en mode de  
lecture ou d’enregistrement, le  
magnétoscope entrera en mode  
d’arrêt et le DVD restera dans le  
mode actuel.  
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
(Enregistrement  
normal)  
(8:00)  
(7:30)  
115  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
FUNAI CORP. will repair this FUNAI product, free of charge in the USA in the event of defect in materials  
or workmanship as follows:  
DURATION:  
PARTS:  
LABOR:  
FUNAI CORP. will provide parts to replace defective parts without charge for one (1) year  
from the date of original retail purchase. Two (2) years for Picture Tube. Certain parts are  
excluded from this warranty.  
FUNAI CORP. will provide the labor without charge for a period of ninety (90) days from the  
date of original retail purchase.  
LIMITS AND EXCLUSIONS:  
This warranty is extended only to the original retail purchaser. A purchase receipt or other proof of origi-  
nal retail purchase will be required together with the product to obtain service under this warranty.  
This warranty shall not be extended to any other person or transferee.  
This warranty is void and of no effect if any serial numbers on the product are altered, replaced, defaced,  
missing or if service was attempted by an unauthorized service center. This FUNAI Limited warranty does  
not apply to any product not purchased and used in the United States.  
This product is produced for home use and this warranty only covers failures due to defects in material or  
workmanship which occurs during normal use. It does not cover damage which occurs in shipment, or fail-  
ures which are caused by repairs, alterations or product not supplied by FUNAI CORP., or damage which  
results from accident, misuse, abuse, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, improper  
maintenance, commercial use such as hotel, rental or office use of this product or damage which results  
from fire, flood, lightning or other acts of God.  
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER PACKING MATERIALS, ANY ACCESSORIES (EXCEPT  
REMOTE CONTROL), ANY COSMETIC PARTS, COMPLETE ASSEMBLY PARTS, DEMO OR FLOOR  
MODELS.  
FUNAI CORP. AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES OR AGENTS SHALL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
GENERAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR OCCASIONED BY  
THE USE OF OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF  
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND OF ALL OTHER LIABILITIES ON THE PART  
OF FUNAI, ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY FUNAI AND ITS  
REPRESENTATIVES IN THE UNITED STATES. ALL WARRANTY INSPECTIONS AND REPAIRS MUST  
BE PERFORMED BY A FUNAI AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER. THIS WARRANTY IS ONLY VALID  
WHEN THE UNIT IS CARRIED-IN TO A FUNAI AUTHORIZED SERVICE FACILITY.  
IMPORTANT:  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS.YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS  
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IF, AT ANY TIME DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD, YOU ARE  
UNABLE TO OBTAIN SATISFACTION WITH THE REPAIR OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE CONTACT  
FUNAI CORP.  
ATTENTION:  
FUNAI CORP. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY ANY DESIGN OF THIS PRODUCT  
WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.  
To locate your nearest FUNAI Authorized Service Center or for general service proce-  
dure, please call 1-800-605-8453 or write to the following:  
FUNAI CORPORATION, INC.  
SERVICE CENTER  
19900 Van Ness Avenue, Torrance, CA 90501  
Tel :1-800-605-8453  
http://www.funai.us  
Head Office: 100 North Street, Teterboro, NJ 07608  
PLEASE DO NOT SHIP YOUR UNIT TO THE TETERBORO ADDRESS.  
1VMN20226 / E9460UD ★★★★★  
Printed in China  

Hotpoint EH12 User Manual
Elo TouchSystems Elo Entuitive 3000 Series 2039L User Manual
Electrolux EHG 672 User Manual
Dell Computer Monitor G2410 User Manual
CDA HVC60 User Manual
AT T SPIRIT Attendant User Manual
Asus P9X79 LE LGA2011 X79 CHIPSET P9X79 LE User Manual
Apple Logic Board User Manual
AOC L26W661 User Manual
AEG HK854220IB User Manual